Home

KYOCERA FS-C8025MFP

1. 9 16 Oy SUC Mew TH 9 18 BAT seeni EE EE E E E 9 23 Adjustment MAINMCNANCE usieusdcaescexet stupro Rus tek toasts a E si twr EAA dis 9 25 Color Registration Procedure ccccssscccesececessceceesecceauecceeueeecsueeeceuececeueeecsaaeesseeeessueeeeseeessageesssaesessaes 9 27 user Cogn AdMIMS TAUON iage E NEE E 9 33 First USEF Login AGMINISUAUOMN 2 ciisicrtinsvarcsasiarisdedalenswaderudeasinnddidaniiauesdsnsuwsnadedanidatduadeasinnsuapeasiadiainbiaaddadans 9 33 user Login SGUWNOS We X 9 34 Enabling Disabling User Login Administration cccccccccseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeesseeeeeseeeeaeeeeeas 9 35 L cal User AUINONZANOM ETE OTT 9 41 Adano a USE m TTT E 9 37 Edit rig and Deleting USCIS aussszzskxuasdsdvxk usa pR2AME GA aE NE Eag ian eiei 9 43 vlanedlbos i E E EEEE 9 46 SUP PUN ORI ZEON celeste RE to 9 52 Obtain Network User Property ccccccssscccseseecceeceeceeceeceeuseceaseesseseeeceeesseaeeessaaeessueeessueeesegeeessgeessags 9 56 JOO ACCOUN NRI m 9 58 First JOD ACCOUNUNG SCIUP E ii 9 58 JOD ACCOUNTING SENOS sriresineisign nen A Eaa R aN EEEE ee 9 60 Enabling Disabling JOD ACCOUMUNG uina ita nter na eo sabes aspe turrem doe eura dic ua ruit un don
2. A GB0001 01 GB0002 04 Close Add Edi Shortcu i Use V or A to scroll up and down Select the function 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color i a 2 Off 4 0 4 l Menu Cancel lt Back e Allows you to add edit or delete a destination GB0063_00 GB0938_00 Select the destination Select an e mail address from the address book Searches by destination name Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 TW Address Book 2 f Ext Address Book 1 gt 1 1 aep bbb abc com Eg Address Entry gt ccc abc com E My Address el ddd abc com GB0064_00 GB0398_00 Allows you to search for and sort destinations Displays details for individual destinations 3 60 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 4 Select the e mail address from an external address book Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 F Address Book a gt E Ext Address Book 1 1 Em Address Entry gt My Address e GB0064 00 For details on the External Address Book refer to KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide Enter the e mail address directly Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 WS Address Book E Ext Address Book 1 gt Ea Address Entry E My Address el Up to 128 characters can be entered GB0064_00
3. 10 8 Responding to Error Messages ccccsccecssceceececeececeucecsececsceceeeseaeeseaeessueeecaeessaececseseseeesseeeseeessaeseseessneeees 10 13 CICARING F AVG IANS e H 10 23 dain Location pelle A ONS ETT 10 23 MUn Uere WRAY m E HH 10 24 inside the Right COVERT E 10 24 cour Nr I 10 25 inside the Right COVEr J M 10 25 G2 Sr O a E E E E A EE E E A ES 10 26 Optional Document Finisher ec ccccccceeeeceececeeeeceececeeeeseeeeceeeeseaeeseaeeseueeseaeeseeeseneesegeesneesneesaneees 10 26 Optional Document Finisher Staple Jam cccccccccseececeseceeeecceeeceeeecseeceseueeseuceseeeeseuseseueesaueeseeeseess 10 27 PRAI AIIE ooe e e E E E E E E T A 10 27 PIGEON VOCS SSOP TE E E TEE TEE 10 28 10 1 Troubleshooting gt Toner Container Replacement Toner Container Replacement When the touch panel displays Toner is empty replace the toner A CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box Dangerous sparks may cause burns NOTE Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations Installation proce
4. 1105 Failed to send via SMB Select On of the SMB settings on the COMMAND CENTER 2 24 Failed to send the e mail Select On of the SMTP settings on the COMMAND CENTER Failed to send via FTP Select On of the FTP settings on the COMMAND CENTER 1106 Failed to send the e mail Check the sender address of SMTP on the COMMAND 2 24 CENTER 1131 Failed to send via FTP Select On of the secure protocol settings on the COMMAND 2 24 CENTER 1132 Failed to send via FTP Check the followings of the FTP server 2 24 s FTPS available s the encryption available 2101 Failed to send via SMB Check the network and SMB settings 2 24 The network cable is connected The hub is not operating properly The server is not operating properly Host name and IP address Port number Failed to send via FTP Check the network and FTP settings he network cable is connected e he hub is not operating properly e he server is not operating properly Host name and IP address Port number Failed to send the e mail Check the network and COMMAND CENTER The network cable is connected he hub is not operating properly e POP3 server name of the POP3 user e SMTP server name 10 21 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages Error Corrective Actions Reference Page 2102 Failed to send via FTP Check the followings of the FTP server 2103 e Is
5. 6 10 Configuring Windows Firewall for Windows 7 esses 6 11 SPSCITVING DSSTIMAUOMN 6 15 Choosing from the Address BOOK wii lt acssivsoeccnantacecseesanincece samtdeasisecevewerenaonstensacmelcandesauensmeadeasaencomnonteneden 6 15 Choosing DY ONE TOUCH KEY gecwccacewsssindantcwssunonanssiemedeteruten Secs b ae stones ita n Eea E oec Fes saaa vac tees modb hens 6 17 Entering a New E miall AGGleSS iivaisq uro tepes tnmaneiaads dankwiadb nU autdestadedeenstadaniesasbiamuntadebad iw P PPNU InUaP IER RN CUN CR 6 18 Specifying a New PC Folder ccc ccccccecccececnecceeeeceeecueecanecaueececeucecsuecseeseueesaeesaeesaeessueesaeesseessansseeesagess 6 19 CHECKING and Editing Destinations 5 mentiti e pur Sue etim pa airaa E Sor Comte eaobueacnsmobenedend 6 22 Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending seeeesseeeeeeeereeeeeeeen 6 23 Registering Destinations in the Address BOOK sssssssssssssssssssssseee nennen nennen nnn esee snae nnn n is 6 24 PROGINS OPAC NR T m 6 24 Adna AOUD c 6 28 Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries esses nemen 6 31 Adding a Destination on One Touch Key sssssssssesssesseee nennen nnne nnne ases ese saai asa esas essa asa sanas 6 33 PROGINS uarie Me e
6. Description Quick Print Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions Each time you click an icon it changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings ial il Orientation Calor Made Collate Print on both Multiple pages sides per sheet I i Basic This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used You can use it to configure the paper size destination duplex printing and color mode Layout This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts including booklet printing combine mode poster printing and scaling Finishing This tab lets you configure settings related to finishing of printed media including binding and stapling Imaging This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality and color mode of the print results Publishing This tab lets you create cover sheets and insert and add OHP film for print jobs Job This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine Regularly used documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later Since saved documents can be printed directly from the machine this function is also convenient when you wish to print a document that you don t want others to see Advanced This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data It also provides simple color adjustment functionality
7. Functions Cancel Select the function to use for Document Box GB0096_00 Press Functions to display other functions 7 6 Document Box gt Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB For details refer to Functions for Document Box on page 7 9 N 6 Start storing Start Press the Start key to start storing Remove the USB memory For details refer to Removing USB Memory on page 7 8 1 1 Document Box gt Removing USB Memory Removing USB Memory Certain operations must be performed on the screen before USB memory can be removed Q IMPORTANT Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory 1 Display the screen Document LEN Box Qe Job Box Removable Memory m M4 1 10 10 V gt 1 1 _ Sub Address Box Polling Box GB0051_00 2 Select Remove Memory Use v or A to scroll up and down 10 10 Eu ABC 23 DEF 1 25 gt eu gt Sort Name vow 1 gt I Sort Date and Time m n 3 Remove the USB memory After Removable Memory can be safely removed is displayed press OK and remove the USB memory NOTE USB memory can also be removed after checking the status of the device For details refer to Check of Device Status on page 8 11 N GB0107_01 Document Box gt Functions for Document Box Functions for Document Box Print or
8. Responding to Send Error leTeTe Error Corrective Actions Reference Page 1101 Failed to send the e mail Check the host name of the SMTP server on the COMMAND 2 24 CENTER Failed to send via FTP Check the host name of FTP 6 20 Failed to send via SMB Check the host name of SMB 6 19 1102 Failed to send via SMB Check the SMB settings 6 20 Login user name and login password NOTE If the sender is a domain user specify the domain name e Host name e Path Failed to send the e mail Check the followings on the COMMAND CENTER 2 24 e SMTP login user name and login password e POP3 login user name and login password Failed to send via FTP Check the FTP settings 6 20 Login user name and login password NOTE If the sender is a domain user specify the domain name e Path Folder share permissions of the recipient 10 20 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages Error Corrective Actions Reference Page 1103 Failed to send via SMB Check the SMB settings 6 20 Login user name and login password NOTE If the sender is a domain user specify the domain m name e Path Folder share permissions of the recipient Failed to send via FTP Check the FTP settings 6 20 Path Folder share permissions of the recipient 1104 Failed to send the e mail Check the e mail address 6 18 NOTE If the address is rejected by the domain you cannot send the e mail
9. 8 User Login Settings gt x S a Job Accounting WII NN Ir amm 1D JOD Reject GB0434 00 NOTE You can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 9 37 for the default login user name and password Enter login user name and password 10 10 Login User Name Login Password Keyboard a el GB0723_00 2 Configure the function System Menu Counter 10 10 Job Accounting Print EE o e O Report Total Job Accounting Each Job Accounting GB0461 00 Enabling Disabling Job Accounting gt page 9 61 N Login Logout gt page 9 62 Adding an Account gt page 9 63 Editing and Deleting Accounts gt page 9 65 Restricting the Use of the Machine P page 9 67 Counting the Number of Pages Printed gt page 9 69 Printing an Accounting Report gt page 9 71 Job Accounting Default Setting gt page 9 73 Unknown Login User Name Job page 9 75 9 60 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Enabling Disabling Job Accounting Enable job accounting 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 60 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 Job Accounting Off Print AcCounung Keport Total Job Accounting Each Job Accounting GB0461_00 2 Enable job accounting 10 10 or 1 1 d NOTE When the display returns to the System Menu default screen logout is
10. Fl Scan Resolution dpi 300x300dpi Close Add Edit Shortcu Use V or A to scroll up and down GB0055 00 GB0081 01 3 37 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 2 Scan to USB Ready to store in Box 10 10 LA File Format Ml Density L File Name abf Entry Normal 0 doc 2 sided LL Book Resolution PDF 1 sided 300x300dpi Cancel Select the type of original 2 sided or Book Ready to send 1 sided 2 sided OK 10 10 Others Others 1 Others 2 sided Book Cancel 2 Select the type of original Ready to send OK c 10 10 2 sided Book Original 1 sided OK d 3 Select the original orientation Original Orientation 1 Top Edge on Top 10 10 2 sided Book Original 2 sided Binding Left Right 1 1 OK e 3 38 GB0096 00 GB0013 00 GB0013 00 GB0014 00 GB0014 01 Ready to send 10 10 Tg 1 sided LX 2 sided Binding Left Right Ky 2 sided Binding Top 1 2 iJe Book Binding Left Use V or AN to scroll up and down Cancel Ready to send 10 10 S Top Edge on Left d GB0011 00 GB0015 00 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Continuous Scan ony sona fen USB Scan a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce
11. 2 in 1 or 4 in 1 Others 1 Others 2in1 Ready to copy Full Color Cancel Ready to copy Full Color B or emu Collate sv Favorites OK e 10 10 4in1 Cancel OK c 2 Select the desired Combine option Ready to copy Full Color Combine Off 10 10 GB0001 01 GB0016 00 GB0016 00 Yi 2in1 LtoR TtoB 7 2in1 RtoL B to T Z 4in1 Right then Down GB0017 00 GB0018 00 Use VV or AN to scroll up and down Copying gt Copying Functions 3 Sets the boundary line type 10 10 10 10 M _ Solid Line 1 L to R T to B Border Line PE eae 1 1 i Original Orientation Top Edge on Top Lag Dotted Line Positioning Mark GB0017 01 p NF d 4 Select the original orientation 10 10 10 10 Combine 2 in 1 L to R T to B Border Line Original Orientation Top Edge on Top A Top Edge on Top 8 Top Edge on Left i GB0017 01 A 4 14 GB0019 00 lt Te o o a o Copying gt Copying Functions EcoPrint Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing Use this function for test copies or any other occasion when high quality print is not required 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen 2 10 10 10 10 x m Copes Ero d
12. Color Select Send Store page 9 12 Original Image page 9 12 Background Density Adj page 9 12 EcoPrint page 9 12 Prevent Bleed through page 9 12 FAX TX Resolution refer to Fax Operation Guide Zoom page 9 12 Margin page 9 12 Continuous Scan page 9 12 Auto Image Rotation page 9 12 File Name Entry page 9 13 E mail Subject Body page 9 13 FTP Encrypted TX page 9 13 JPEG TIFF Print page 9 13 XPS Fit to Page page 9 13 Detail Settings page 9 Image Quality page 9 13 13 PDF A page 9 13 Paper Output page 9 13 Copy Document Box page 9 13 Printer page 9 13 FAX refer to Fax Operation Guide Preset Limit page 9 13 Error Handling page 9 14 Duplexing Error page 9 14 Finishing Error page 9 14 No Staple Error page 9 14 Stapling Limit Error page 9 14 Paper Mismatch Error page 9 14 Inserted Paper Mismatch page 9 14 Color Toner Empty Action page 9 14 Measurement page 9 14 Keyboard Layout page 9 15 USB Keyboard Type page 9 15 XVI Copy page 9 75 Auto Paper Selection page 9 75 Auto Priority page 9 75 Reserve Next Priority page 9 15 Send page 9 15 Dest Check before Send page 9 15 Entry Check for New Dest page 9 15 Send and Forward Forward page 9 16 age 9 16 pag De
13. Group Authorization Set gt Use V or A to scroll up and down GB0435_03 GB0450_00 2 Select On 10 10 Off On 1 1 oe el GB0451_00 Add a Group Register the groups that is restricted the machine usage Up to 20 groups can be individually registered Other users and groups belong to Others Group ID Enter the ID displayed on the group list between 1 and 4294967295 Group Name Enter the name displayed on the group list up to 32 characters Access Level Select Administrator or User for group access privileges Printer Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer Printer Full Color Select whether or not to reject usage of full color print functions for the printer Copy Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions Copy Full Color Select whether or not to reject usage of full color print functions for copies Send Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions FAX Transmission Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions 9 52 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Storing in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes Storing in Memory Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory A For Group ID specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by ActiveDirectory of Windows If you a
14. Q IMPORTANT Use USB memory formatted by this machine If a USB memory formatted by any other device is used The removable memory is not formatted may appear Refer to Check of Device Status on page 8 11 N Document Box gt Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB 3 Display the screen 4 10 10 Eu to EE ABC BD xc Vv When the machine reads the USB memory Removable Memory screen may appear NOTE If the screen does not appear press the Document Box key and then Removable Memory GB0089 00 Select the folder 10 10 10 10 emovahle Cw 8 11 3 32PG 7 9 2 1PG eo e 1 1 o J ol S a Oo 10 10 GB0089 00 Document Box 3 Store File Select All Select the folder where the file will be stored and press Menu and then Store File GB0107 00 The machine will display the top 3 folder levels including the root folder To return to a higher level folder press Back NOTE Up to 100 documents and folders can be displayed for each directory If the number of documents and folders in a directory exceeds 100 you will be unable to save additional documents Select the functions Ready to store in Box 10 10 EMEN lr GGEDNSESMNN 7T Uu File 2 sided F Scan TI Format Book Resolution PDF 1 sided 300x300dpi E Density File Name paran abf Enry Normal 0 doc
15. a a 1 Lj 2 staples l Ca O o 2 Select the staple position 00 Ready to copy Full Color Staple Off l 1 staple Top Left E 1 staple Top Right l 2 staples Left Cancel GB0033 00 Use v or AN to scroll up and down 3 Select the original orientation 10 10 10 10 Staple A Top Edge on Top 4 staples Riaht Original Orientation Top Edge on Top le Top Edge on Left 1 1 5 Lc d GB0033 01 NOTE Original Orientation is not displayed when printing a document from USB memory 3 49 GB0034 00 GB0015 02 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Density Adjust density using 7 levels ix A 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Copy Scan to USB Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to store in Box 10 10 Er COEM i gy 3 Paper N Zoom A Density TL File ik si F Scan TER Format Resolution Selection C Auto 100 Normal 0 PDF 0 REA um EE ENS ee Duplex 4 3 Combine Collate all Density Be LO Offset mai 1 sided 1 sided Off Collate Normal 0 GB0096 00 5 8 O Send Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 Dest 0 i Check Density Recall m Normal 0 1
16. 11 18 CODY HOC i rc 11 19 suuin MUNCH lg MEMO 11 20 viec d 11 20 DOCUMENT aree o MNT Emm 11 21 Paper Feeder single cassette option sse nennen nennen nnn nnn nnns 11 21 Paper Feeder double cassette option ccecccccecceceeeeeeseeeeeseeeceseeeeeseeeeseeeeesseeeesseeeeseeeeesaeeeesaeeeeas 11 21 Blereiias ids 11 22 Environmental Specifications OE 11 22 MOSS aar EEE 11 23 Appendix gt Optional Equipment Optional Equipment Overview of Optional Equipment The following optional equipment is available for the machine ee n Z Y 7 Expansion Memory 11 2 Appendix gt Optional Equipment Paper Feeder single cassette An additional cassette identical to the machine s cassettes can be installed in the machine Paper capacity and loading method are the same as Cassettes 1 Paper Feeder double cassette Two additional cassettes identical to the machine s cassettes can be installed in the machine Paper capacity and loading method are the same as Cassettes 1 Document Finisher The document finisher holds a large quantity of finished copies The finisher offers a convenient means of sorting Sorted finished cop
17. 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documenta
18. Adjust the image to match the send or store size NOTE Original Size page 3 32 Sending Size page 6 37 Storing Size page 7 14 and Zoom are related to each other Refer to Sending Size on page 6 37 and Storing Size on page 7 14 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 Dest 0 Recall Check As Background Density Adj 5 E Prevent Bleed through One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book E mail li Add Edi Shortcu p Use v or A to scroll up and down GB0055 00 GB0081 03 Press Functions and then Zoom 2 Select the function 10 10 100 Auto e ra GB0087_00 3 56 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions File Format o USB opecify the image file format In addition you can adjust the image quality level Saves or sends a PDF file You can specify the format that comply with PDF A Saves or sends a TIFF file Saves or sends a JPEG file Each page will be saved individually XPS Saves or sends a file in XPS Others File Format Select from PDF TIFF JPEG and XPS Image Quality Set the image quality from 1 to 5 Low Quality High Quality PDF A Set PDF A from PDF A 1a and PDF A 1b This setting is displayed only when PDF has been selected as the file
19. Checkpoints Take some paper out of the job separator Printing then resumes When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses Corrective Actions Reference Page KPDL error PostScript error has occurred The job is canceled Press End When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Low temperature Adjust room Adjust the temperature and the humidity 1 3 temp of your room 10 16 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages Error Message Machine failure Checkpoints Corrective Actions Internal error has occurred Make a note of the error code displayed on the touch panel and contact your Service Representative Reference Page Maximum number of scanned pages Is the acceptable scanning count exceeded Only one copy of the scanned pages is available Press Continue to print send or store the scanned pages Press Cancel to cancel printing sending or storing Memory is full Unable to continue the job as the memory is used up Press Continue to print the scanned pages The print job cannot be processed completely Press Cancel to cancel the job The process cannot be performed due to insufficient memory If only End is available press End T
20. Combine 2 or 4 originals into 1 sheet Combine gt page 4 12 Collate the output documents in page order Offset the output documents by set Collate Offset gt page 3 43 Specify the original size Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction Original Size gt page 3 32 Original Orientation gt page 3 34 Copy mixed size originals Mixed Size Originals page 3 35 Change the paper output Staple in the output documents Paper Output P page 3 42 Staple gt page 3 48 Change the color mode Color Selection gt page 3 59 Select original image type for best results Original Image gt page 3 52 Save toner when printing EcoPrint gt page 4 15 Make a copy after changing the appearance of the original s colors Hue Adjustment gt page 4 16 Adjust colors for example by strengthening cyan or magenta tones Color Balance gt page 4 17 Emphasize the outline of texts or lines Blur the image outline Sharpness 5 page 3 53 Darken or lighten the background i e the area with no text or images of originals Background Density Adjust gt page 3 54 Prevent bleed through for 2 sided originals Prevent Bleed through gt page 3 55 Make a copy with more vivid colors Saturation gt page 4 18 Add margins white space Margin gt page 3 45 Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce a
21. Date Time Network settings Obtain IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway For details about settings refer to the help information displayed on the touch panel To make N changes after this initial configuration refer to Date Timer on page 9 23 and System on page 9 18 2 22 Preparation before Use gt COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail COMMAND CENTER is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and changing the settings for security network printing E mail transmission and advanced networking NOTE Here information on the FAX settings has been omitted For more information on using the FAX refer to the FAX Operation Guide The optional Fax Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality 4 Display the screen 1 Launch your Web browser 2 Inthe Address or Location bar enter the machine s IP address E g http 192 168 48 21 GO eu E The web page displays basic information about the machine and COMMAND CENTER as well as their current status 2 Configure the function Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen The values for each category must be set separately If restrictions have been set for COMMAND CENTER enter a password to access pages other than the startup page The default password is adminOO The password can be changed
22. e When the machine is placed in Low Power Mode by pressing the Energy Saver key 3 13 Common Operations gt Favorites Favorites Frequently used functions can be registered as favorites so that they can be called up easily The following functions are pre registered on this machine You can delete these functions as well as register new functions The functions created by the external software such as File Management Utility are also displayed here e ID Card Copy e Paper Saving Copy e Scan to PC Address Entry e Scan to PC Address Book e Scan to E mail Address Entry e Scan to E mail Address Book Registering Favorites When registering a favorite you can choose from two methods for calling it up e Wizard mode Registered settings are called up in order and configured as you check or change each one e Program mode Settings are called up immediately when you press the key to which they are registered NOTE Up to 20 settings can be registered as favorites 4 Configure the function Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Copies Ef MM m SS Sy Paper OW Zoom all Density LS Selection gt So Auto 100 Normal 0 ur uud o ee IT Duplex Combine prr COllate Li Offset 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off Collate GB0001 01 When registering favorites in program mode configure the copy function send function fax function option destination or ot
23. GB0042 00 GB0015 01 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Staple o USB otaple documents In addition you can specify the staple position NOTE Stapling requires the document finisher The following stapling options and orientations are available Original Orientation Original Orientation Top Edge Back Edge Left Top Edge Left top corner MA JA Cassette Paper Load Direction E Cassette Paper Load Direction u 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Staple Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Copy m Copies 1 i Ta E a u En Staple H Densi or Paper Zoom amp Density Selection Les m UrlUIridi LITdye Auto 100 Normal 0 cd Text Photo Te ee ee c he Duplex Combine gra Collate Off LJ Offset Sharpness 1 sided 1 sided O Collate t 0 sv Favorites Close Add Edi Shortcut zh GBO0001 01 GB0002 05 Use V or AN to scroll up and down 3 48 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 2 Select the staple position 1 staple or 2 staples Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 1 staple 2 staples Off 2 staples Others S x Jf 5 Others 1 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10
24. If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately move to the function screen and press the Reset key Send Configures settings for sending functions Description Dest Check before Send When performing sending jobs display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the Start key Value Off On Entry Check for New Dest When adding new destination display the entry check screen to check the entered destination Value Off On Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Send and Forward Description Set whether to send the original to another destination and store it when sending images Forward Set the rule to send the original Multiple rules can be selected Value Forward Off On Rule FAX E mail Folder SMB Folder FTP NOTE FAX is displayed when the optional FAX kit is installed Destination Set the destination to use when storing originals Select the destination using either of the following methods e Address Book e Ext Address Book e Address Entry E mail e Address Entry Folder Color TIFF Compression Select the compression method for TIFF images handled on this machine Value TIFF V6 TTN2 Default Screen Printer Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you press the Send key Value Destination Address Book Ext Address Book One Touch Printing from computers settings are generally made on t
25. Option eKUIO 2 Operating Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F LLL Humidity 15 to 80 Altitude 2 500 m 8 202 ft maximum Brightness 1 500 lux maximum Warm up Time Power on 55 seconds or less 45 seconds or less d UE Sleep 23 seconds or less Dimension W x D x H 23 1 4x23 1 4x29 7 16 590x590x748 mm 11 18 Appendix gt Specifications Weight with toner container Description 20 ppm model 25 ppm model Approx 176 Ib Approx 80 kg Space Required W x D 34 7 16x23 1 4 874x590 mm Using multi purpose tray Power Source 120 V Specification Model 120 V 60 Hz 12 A 230 V Specification Model 220 to 240V 50 Hz 60 Hz 7 2 A Options Copy functions Max Copy Speed Paper feeder single cassette Paper feeder double cassette Document finisher FAX kit Expansion memory Card Authentication Kit Gigabit Ethernet Board USB keyboard Description 20 ppm model model Full color Black and White Full color Black and White Letter A4 20 sheets min 20 sheets min 25 sheets min 25 sheets min Letter R A4 R 14 sheets min 14 sheets min 17 sheets min 17 sheets min Ledger A3 8 sheets min 10 sheets min 9 sheets min 13 sheets min Legal B4 9 sheets min 10 sheets min 10 sheets min 13 sheets min B5 20 sheets min 20 sheets min 25 sheets min 25 sheets min B5 R 14 sheets min 14 sheets min 17 sheets min 17 sheets
26. When you open a new package of paper fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps 1 3 SN A M N CLAW y e AS ind od 2 4 S M AEN E d 1 Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the middle 2 Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while keeping the entire stack swelled 3 Raise the right and left hands alternately to create a gap and feed air between the papers 4 Finally align the papers on a level flat table If the paper is curled or folded straighten it before loading Paper that is curled or folded may cause a jam Q IMPORTANT If you copy onto used paper paper already used for copying do not use paper that is stapled or clipped together This may damage the machine or cause poor image quality NOTE If printouts are curled or not neatly stapled turn the stack in the cassette upside down If you use special paper such as letterhead paper with holes or paper with pre prints like logo or company name refer to Paper on page 11 10 Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the paper storage bag If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag 3 2 Common Operations gt Loading Paper Loading Paper in
27. amp E 5 EB Command Prompt 3 _ a Microsoft Windows Version 6 1 76606 Copyright lt c gt 2669 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved C Users james smith gt net config workstation Computer name NNPCBB Full Computer name User name Workstation active on NetBT_Tcpip_C XXXXXXXK XRXK XRRX RRRR RARRARRRRARR CKHXXXXRRRRRR Software version Jindous 7 Ultimate Workstation domain ABCDNET Logon domain ABCDNET COM Open Timeout Csec gt A COM Send Count Chyte gt 16 COM Send Timeout Cmsec gt 256 The command completed successfully C Users james smith gt e Screen example user name james smith and domain name ABCDNET sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Creating a Shared Folder Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer NOTE If there is a workgroup in System Properties configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel Appearance and Personalization and then Folder Options Ease OT ACCESS Center E Accommodate low vision Use screen reader Turn on easy access keys Turn High Contrast on or off mug ckto open Show hidden files and folders Fonts E Preview delete or show and hidefonts ChangeFontSettings Adjust ClearType text E NVIDIA Control Panel Windows XP click My Computer and select Folder Options in Tool
28. 0123456 Advanced search by type of registered destination E Sales department 1 b uH c n gt us mail Folder SMB FTP FAX or Group Support department 0234567 QA i support department BOX ea gt Use V or A to scroll up and down GB0429 00 Displays details for individual destinations Select one destination contact or group from the Address Book You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No Search key Sending gt Adding a Destination on One Touch Key 5 You can also press Menu to perform a more detailed search 10 10 E 10 10 System Menu Counter Address Book All IY Q liga Sales department 1 0123456 e Narrow Down Sales department 1 abc e Search Name 1 2 gt Support department 0234567 ew gt Search No Lal Support department BOX ew gt V Sort Name GB0429_00 GB0396_00 el Narrow Down Advanced search by type of registered destination E mail Folder SMB FTP FAX or Group Use V or AN to scroll up and down Search Name and Search No Searches by destination name or address number Sort Name and Sort No Sorts the list by destination name or address number Enter the One Touch Key name 10 10 Address Book All Sales department 1 Input18 3 2 Limit 24 Sales depart t1 0123456 A liga Sales departmen e ABC m Ka
29. 1 2 Safety Conventions in This Guide cccccccseeceececseeceeeceaeeceeesaeeeeaeeseeeseesaeeeseeesagees 1 2 aide BRE cif MR RR 1 3 mise ip 2N089 1 3 Legal Restriction on Copying Scanning seessesssessseseeeeneeen enne 1 8 Legal and Safety Information else nennen nnne nennen nnne nnne nnne nn nis 1 9 Legal I noie 1 9 Energy Saving Control Function sees nnns 1 12 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function ccccecccceccceecceeeeseeeceeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeesaeeeeeeeaeeeees 1 12 melle eee 1 12 Energy Star ENERGY STAR Program ccccccccceececeeeeeeeceeaeeeseeeeseueeeeeeesaeeetaes 1 12 About this Operat n GUIDE m 1 13 Conventions in This Guide 200 ccc ee cc eccc cece cece eeeeeeeaeeeaeeeseeeseueseeeseeeseeesaeesaeesaeeeaes 1 13 Originals and Paper Sizes i oes onmino nag ants ent a deese nua one Hes Raga S dowecdaiceniseedeeeds duo n qu KM MS 1 15 2 Preparation before Use eeeeeeeeeee eene 2 1 mH 2 2 MiretelellB ic A 2 2 Sereni MR nm 2 6 iege IP AMON E 2 1 Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables eeseeeseeeessss 2 8 OTIS CONN cz ME ERRORI m 2 8 Preparing Necessary Cables cccccccsscccse
30. 10 10 h mum mp Lm Collate Only Offset Each Page Fen Offset Each Set x Cancel GB0021 00 3 44 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Margin o USB Add margins white space Margin Width Input units Inch Models Margin Width 0 75 to 0 75 in 0 01 increments Metric Models 18 mm to 18 mm in 1 mm increments Margin on the Back Side When duplex copying you can also specify the margin on the back side Auto When Auto is selected an appropriate margin is applied automatically on the rear page depending on a margin specified for the front page and a binding orientation Manual Enables you to specify the front and back settings separately NOTE You can set the default margin width Refer to Margin on page 9 12 for details 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Margin 10 10 10 10 c y Copies S H Se MICA geek gg Saturation Paper OR Zoom E Density w Selection Auto 100 Normal 0 MP ee ey md fr syg Continuous Scan amp Duplex Combine ggg Collate sd t in I sided gt 1 sided Off Collate gt amp GB0002 03 o vV Close Add Edit Shortcu GB0001 01 Use VV or to scroll up and down 3 45 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 2 Enter the
31. 6 33 Editing and Deleting One Touch Key 5 eret nt rane Ron poma mel Cen F e esa Es gve ets Dn DES aeu cover esvs sa soe era eaaa 6 35 wicaeliqsdm neon P 6 36 NI eiae AG RN NT T 6 37 aulis elc ers pz i10 E ct 6 39 zb sns Mee 6 40 BU EGO P 6 41 WV SCAM 6 42 Scanning USING TVALI U 6 45 6 1 sending gt Basic Operation Basic Operation This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E mail message or to a PC linked to the network In order to do this it is necessary to register the sender and destination recipient address on the network A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required in order to send e mail It is recommended that a Local Area Network LAN be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues To use the transmission function verify the following Program the settings including the E mail setting on the machine Use COMMAND CENTER the internal HTML web page to register the IP address the host name of the SMTP server and the recipient Register the destination in the Address Book or One Touch keys e Create a share folder in the destination computer when a folder SMB FTP is selected as the destination Consult yo
32. Access Level System Menu Counter Save 10 10 Group ID 1234567890 Group Name Access Level Printer Group 01 1 Administrator Off Save 9 54 GB0459_00 GB0460_00 GB0460 00 GB0460 00 System Menu Counter 1 4294967295 1234567890 2 ae s Input Limit 128 System Menu Counter Administrator 3 User Cancel OK 10 10 10 10 A o o Q re E o a o GB0454 00 GB0057 63 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Printer Printer Full Color Copy Copy Full Color Send FAX Transmission Storing in Box Storing in Memory System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Group Name Group 01 Reject Usage i Access Level Administrator Printer Off 1 Cancel System Menu Counter 10 10 GB0460 00 GB0456 00 Printer Full Color Use V or A to scroll up and down Copy Full Color Cancel GB0460 01 FAX Transmission Storing in Box Storing in Memory GB0460 02 e 4 d Change the restrictions as needed 4 Register the group 10 10 off Cancel GB0460 00 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Obtain Network User Property oet the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server NOTE
33. Close Ctrl W Properties Ctrl D Digital Editions Drint Cetin Chifts Ctrl D Print Ctrl P f TTT TTT TT Exit Ctrl Q _ ee Ree Click File and select Print in the application 2 Configure the printer 7 Print Printer Name Properties 2 Status ae Type Document and Markups Y Print Range Preview Composite All K 210 02 34 Subset All pages in range Reverse pages Page Handling Copies i B Collate 297 01 Page Scaling Shrink to Printable Area z v Auto Rotate and Center F Choose paper source by PDF page size Use custom paper size when needed Units mm Zoom 96 Print to file ud c J ewe K 1 Select the printer 2 Click Properties button 5 2 Printing gt Printing from Applications 3 Select the Basic tab 3 Properties 9 Quick 9 Jes Finishing Imaging Publishing Job Advanced Print size Media type Unspecified Destination Auto source selection My Frinter default E Page Sizes Orientation Duplex Portrait Il Print on both sides Landscape Flip on long edge Rotated Flip on shart edge Copies 1 Full color J Collate Black amp White EcoPrint Print preview 6 DM KYOCERA Profiles Cancer 4 Click the Page Sizes button to select the paper size for the document data 5 Click Print size and select the paper size to use
34. Copying gt Copying Functions 2 Select the desired Duplex option Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Duplex 1 sided 1 sided GB0010 00 4 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 M 1 sided gt 1 sided W 1 sided gt gt 2 sided Ut 2 sided 1 sided Q sided 2 sided Vv Use V or A to scroll up and down Cancel GB0024 00 If you choose a 2 sided sheet or book proceed to Step 3 If you choose duplex proceed to Step 4 If you choose Book gt gt 2 sided proceed to Step 5 3 Select the binding edge of the originals Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Qa Left Right Top 2 sided 2 sided Left Right Original Orientation Top Edge on Top n d 4 Select the binding edge of the finished copies Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 10 10 GB0010 01 GB0181 00 d ma Left Right y Top Top Edge on Top d 5 Select the binding edge of the finished copies Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 10 10 Original Orientation NN e GB0010 01 GB0012 00 cn Book gt gt 2 sided Binding in Original 1 t n Book Book 1 1 Binding in Finishing Book 2 sided e GB0010 02 GB0012 01 Copying gt Copying Functions 6 Select the original orientation Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Duplex 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Binding in Original A Top Edg
35. Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the multi purpose tray WNNWWW Inside the Right Cover 1 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside the right cover 1 A Caution The fixing unit is extremely hot Take sufficient care when working in this area as there is a danger of getting burned 10 24 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Cassette 1 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 1 Inside the Right Cover 3 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside the right cover 3 10 25 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Cassette 2 or 3 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 2 or 3 Optional Document Finisher Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional document finisher 10 26 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Optional Document Finisher Staple Jam Follow the steps below to clear staple jams in the optional document finisher Bridge Unit Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the bridge unit LJ SCENES Zr i 10 27 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Document Processor Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the document processor Wy 10 28 11 Appendix This chapter explains the following topics OO T
36. Resolution 600x600 dpi Operating System Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 Apple Macintosh OS X Page Description Language PRESCRIBE Emulations PCL6 PCL5c PCL XL KPDL3 PostScript 3 compatible Scanner Description System requirements CPU 600 Mhz or higher RAM 128 MB or more Resolution 600 dpi 400 dpi 300 dpi 200 dpi 200x100 dpi 200x400 dpi Resolution in FAX mode included File Format TIFF JPEG6 0 tn2 JPEG XPS PDF 1 4 A Scanning Speed A4 landscape 300 dpi Image quality Text Photo original 1 sided B W 40 Images min Color 40 Images min Network Protocol TCP IP PC transmission SMB Scan to SMB Transmission System FTP Scan to FTP FTP over SSL E mail SMTP Scan to E mail transmission TWAIN scan WIA scan When using the document processor except TWAIN and WIA scanning Available Operating System Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 Available Operating System Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 11 20 Appendix gt Specifications Document Processor Description Original Feed Method Automatic feed Supported Original Types Sheet originals Paper Size Maximum Ledger A3 Minimum Statement R A5 R Paper Weight 45 to 160 g m Loading Capacity 50 sheets 50 to 80 g m maximum Mixed
37. Sales department 1 abc c gt Q Wi E R T Y U O P 1 2 em Support department 0234567 ew gt A S D F G H J K L el Support department BOX 1 ew gt VY fz x ol vfejutul Cancel Back Nex gt GB0057 18 C2 D GB0429 00 el Up to 24 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters Register the destination System Menu Counter 10 10 Name Sales department 1 FAX Number 0123456 Sub Address TX Start Speed 33600bps S e GB0754 00 Sending gt Adding a Destination on One Touch Key Editing and Deleting One Touch Key Edit and delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key 1 Display the screen Use V or A to scroll up and down System Menu Counter T gt System Menu Counter Em CNN Document Box lt 5 3 5 E FAX LL Address Book One Touch System Menu Counter 1 N e Mu e eo a o 10 10 Address Book Address Book Defaults Print List gt GB0411 00 2 Edit or delete the destination To edit the destination 10 10 001 Sales 11002 None 003 None i department 1 1 004 None 005 None 006 None 10 10 1 9 008 None 009 None 007 None 011 None 012 None 010 None Select the One Touch Key you wish to edit and press M
38. Xi Document Job Box page 5 6 OX Removable Menu Store File File Format page 3 57 Memory 2 sided Book Original page 3 37 z Scan Resolution page 3 51 Density page 3 50 File Name Entry page 3 62 Functions Original Size page 3 32 Original Orientation page 3 34 Mixed Size Originals page 3 35 Storing Size page 7 14 Color Selection page 3 59 Original Image page 3 52 Sharpness page 3 53 Background Density Adj page 3 54 Prevent Bleed through page 3 55 Zoom page 3 56 Continuous Scan page 3 39 Job Finish Notice page 3 60 Add Edit Shortcut page 3 22 Print Copies page 7 3 Paper Selection page 3 41 Collate Offset page 3 43 Duplex page 7 10 Functions Paper Output page 3 42 Staple page 3 48 Color Selection page 3 59 Margin page 3 45 Job Finish Notice page 3 60 Priority Override page 3 63 Encrypted PDF Password page 7 11 JPEG TIFF Print page 7 12 XPS Fit to Page page 7 13 Add Edit Shortcut page 3 22 Sub Address Box refer to Fax Operation Guide Polling Box refer to Fax Operation Guide xii Status Job Cancel 4 Print Job Status page 8 3 Send Job Status page 8 4 Store Job Status page 8 5 Scheduled Job page 8 5 Print Job Log page 8 6 Send
39. m E o T GB0114_05 To delete EN 10 10 10 10 Address Book All Iya 019 H1 Sales department 1 002 B Support department A Edit A SYSTEM DEP Use V or AN to scroll up and down fh Sales department 1 Member 2 Cancel Delete GB0396_01 GB0788 00 Select the destination contacts or group to delete 6 32 Sending gt Adding a Destination on One Touch Key Adding a Destination on One Touch Key Add a new destination contact or group on One Touch Key Adding a Destination Add a new destination contact or group A maximum of 100 destinations can be registered To register a destination to a One Touch Key it must first be registered in the Address Book Register one or more destinations as needed before proceeding 1 Display the screen Use V or AN to scroll up and down System Menu Counter T gt System Menu Counter p i Document Box 3 5 E FAX L Address Book One Touch v System Menu Counter GB0054 02 Address Book Defaults Print List GB0411 00 2 Add a One Touch Key System Menu Counter ini 002 None 1 003 None 005 None 006 None 008 None 009 None 0n None 012 None Se re ncel GB0422 00 Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination and press 3 Select the destinations 10 10 Address Book All Searches by destination name liga Sales department 1
40. 2 Edit or delete the destination To edit the destination Address Book All Ivua 019 H1 Sales department 1 002 Support department 001 SYSTEM DEP 003 y Sales department 1 Member 2 Menu Cancel Next gt GB0396 01 GB0785 00 T Use V or AN to scroll up and down Select the destination contacts or group to edit You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No Search key Ready to send 10 10 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Sales department 1 Address Number E mail Address Cancel GB0786 00 Change the information as needed by pressing the item in question 6 31 sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book Ready to send 10 10 Name Sales department 1 Address Number Auto E mail Address GB0786 00 Vv EN To delete a member group To delete a member from a group select the destination you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 H f e Js Name Support department 2 iii Sales department 1 0123456 Address Number Auto 1 gt Support department 0234567 cm Member Member 2 1 1 GB0787_00 GB0114_04 d 4 Ready to send 10 10 2n send 10 10 8 Support department 0234567 Gay Name Support department Address Number Auto 1 1 1 gt Member Member 1 GB0787 01
41. 4 Display the screen 10 10 Document Box Removable Memory Document Box 10 10 Sub Address Box n Proof and Hold gt GB0051 00 1 1 el GB0650 00 2 Select the creator of the document to print 10 10 Cancel Back GB0651 00 i 3 Select the document 10 10 Ti Vi doc 4100908135138 c _ doc 0100908134821 GB0653 01 Displays details for individual documents 5 6 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer 4 Print and delete the document To print the document 1 io i Vi doc 4100908135138 e doc 0100908134821 aw 1 1 LJ LI GB0653 01 NOTE The password entry screen will be displayed Enter the password using the numeric keys 10 10 1 999 o o e o eo o a o opecify the number of copies to print as desired When using the number of copies specified with print job select Upon completion of printing the Private Print job is automatically deleted To delete Document Box 10 10 _ doc 0100908134821 uw 1 1 E LJ GB0653 01 lI Mam ej Select the document you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon NOTE The password entry screen will be displayed Enter the password using the numeric keys 5 7 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer Proof and Hold Proof
42. Cancel GB0145_00 e e ST l s D Ready to send 10 10 2 dE Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Color Selection 0208S USB USB Select the color mode setting Auto Color Automatically recognizes whether a document is color or black and white and then scans the document Auto Color Gray Automatically detects whether the document is color or black and white and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale Auto Color B amp W Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black and white and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and White Full Color Scan document in full color Grayscale Scan document in grayscale for smoother and finer finish Black amp White Scan document in black and white File size is smaller than Full Color or Grayscale This function is displayed while copying or printing This function is displayed while sending or storing kk 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Color Selection 10 10 10 10 Copies NN nnnm Ke ee color Selection Paper R Zoom A Density Full Color AN ER wn N Selection ek Original Image Auto 100906 Normal 0 ce Text Photo Tm
43. Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper cccceecccseeeceeeeeeeeeceeeecaeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeessneeseeeesanees 8 1 Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job Status E gt Checking Job Status Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed Available Status Screens The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs and Scheduled Jobs The following job statuses are available Print Job Status Copy Printer Printing from Document Box FAX reception E mail reception Job Report List Printing data from removable memory Send Job Status FAX transmission Folder SMB FTP transmission E mail Application Mixed Multiple destination Store Job Status Scan FAX Printer Scheduled Job Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission Display the screen 10 10 Status J O b C ance L Print Job ids 2 B Job Status Bee Job Status 4 foreau Job v Print Jobs Press either of Print Job Status Send Job Status Store Job Status or Scheduled Job to check the status GB0052_00 Check the status 10 10 0089 doc0000892010092514 5 23 SS 1 1 Cancel Pause All Close PrintJobs Refer to Print Job Status Screen on page 8 3 Send Job Status screen on page 8 4 Store Job N Status
44. Custom Off On Size Entry Inch models X 2 to 17 in 0 01 increments Y 2 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models X 50 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Y 50 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Original Auto Detect Description Automatically detect originals of special or non standard size A6 Hagaki As A6 and Hagaki are similar in size select either one of them for automatic detection Value A6 Hagaki Folio Select Folio for automatic detection Value Off On 11 x 15 Paper Settings Custom Paper Size Select the 11x15 size for automatic detection Value Off On Description Set up frequently used custom paper size To register a custom paper size press On and enter the desired size The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select paper set in the multi purpose tray Value Custom Off On Size Entry Inch models X 5 83 to 17 in 0 01 increments Y 3 86 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models X 148 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Y 98 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments Media Type Setting Select weight for each media type For Custom 1 8 settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed For details refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 11 Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1 3 and multi purpose tray Value Cass
45. Further use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 2 12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement understand it and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party By opening this diskette package you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement Preface gt Legal and Safety Information Energy Saving Control Function The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of time Sleep The device automatically enters Sleep when 20 minutes for the 20 ppm model or 30 minutes for the 25 ppm model have passed since the device was last used The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened For more information refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 21 Low Power Mode The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 3 minutes have passed since the device was last used The amoun
46. GB0446 00 Enter the same login password twice for confirmation purposes Accounting Name Select the item that you want to change 10 10 User Name User A Login User Name User A Login Password Account Name Others Cancel ave KKKKKKKKKK GB0446_00 E mail Address 10 10 E mail Address N User 1 My Panel Access Level Local Authorization d GB0446 01 Access Level 10 10 E mail Address 1 Access Level User My Panel Local Authorization n Select the user access privilege GB0446 01 9 39 Input Limit 54 Inputs Limit64 Cancel Allows you to search for an account name and sorts results Searches by account name System Menu Counter Q p i 10 10 GB0057 28 GB0057 29 GB0603 00 Displays details for individual account names Input 11 Limit 128 System Menu Counter Administrator 10 10 User el GB0057_30 GB0443_00 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration My Panel 10 10 10 10 E mail Address Access Level User 1 My Panel Local Authorization Language Default Screen Shortcut Shared Shortcut GB0446_01 For details on My Panel refer to My Panel on page 9 42 Local Authorization System Menu Counter 10 10 10 10 E mail Address Access Level User My Panel Printer Off 2 f
47. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper oelect a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper Transparencies Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing Transparencies must meet the following conditions Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190 C Thickness 0 100 to 0 110 mm Material Polyester Dimensional accuracy 0 7 mm Squareness of corners 90 0 2 To avoid problems use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the machine If transparencies jam frequently at output try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected 11 14 Appendix gt Paper Label Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray For selecting labels use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure When printing onto labels you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble Top sheet Carrier sheet Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected by the fo
48. Profiles Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile Saved profiles can be recalled at any time so it s a convenient practice to save frequently used settings Reset Click to revert settings to their initial values 5 4 Printing gt Printing from Applications Printer Driver Help The printer driver includes Help To learn more about print settings display the printer driver print settings screen and display Help using either of the methods explained below Properties T NEWEST E JH TU aa E Emm Lc n Orientation Color EN Collate Print on both Multiple pages sides ner sheet e Click the button in the upper right corner of the screen and then click the item you want to know about N D h Click the item you want to know about and press the F1 key on your keyboard 5 5 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer Printing Data Saved on the Printer Print data can be saved in the machine s Job Box and printed when needed Private Print Private Print stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Private Print Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Private Print using the printer driver NOTE RAM disk mode must be enabled RAM disk mode can be used when optional memory has been installed For details refer to RAM Disk Setting on page 9 23 X
49. Q lt Ww a lt Q lt n I i I i N ONIUWEPAWAH AOnNnANOWOND vo UU B Qt QH o Oci5NvotU utmun 0 UU0ppouotuu c Ovi MN O UJ C uj f 0 UU0mppotugud c Ov i5 N O UJ C i f iM OnNANOWOUND ll 0 010 P OlgGH 3 H K lt N K lt w 3 e K lt v ONUwWEPOWAH OnNANOWOUND vo UU HB POtQH OnNANOWOUND 0o 1Ut0nppo0Otugonu OnNANOWUND o 1U0ppoOtgouu 0o O65 NOIU Utm WN NWP POAAH OnNnARNOWUOWD 3 Enter the appropriate value 1 Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match If this is the O position registration for that color is not required For the illustration B is the appropriate value IGECA13573 9 HFDBO2 468 I G E C A 1 3 5 From charts V 1 to V 5 read only the values from V 3 center System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Print Chart Registration y 1 1 E 3 GB0641 00 GB0642 01 9 31 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu 3 Select the chart to be corrected 10 10 GB0643 01 4 Press or to enter the values read from the chart 10 10 GB0644 01 e Press to increase the value from 0 to 9 To decrease press By pressing the value changes from 0 to alphabetic letters going from A to To move in the reverse direction press You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the registr
50. Saturation page 4 78 Margin page 3 45 Continuous Scan page 3 39 Auto Image Rotation page 4 19 Job Finish Notice page 3 60 File Name Entry page 3 62 Priority Override page 3 63 Add Edit Shortcut page 3 22 Send One Touch Key page 6 17 Address Book page 6 15 Ext Address Book refer to KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide E mail page 6 78 Folder page 6 79 FAX refer to Fax Operation Guide WSD Scan page 6 42 Functions File Format page 3 57 Original Size page 3 32 Original Orientation page 3 34 Mixed Size Originals page 3 35 2 sided Book Original page 3 37 Sending Size page 6 37 File Separation page 6 39 Scan Resolution page 3 57 Density page 3 50 Color Selection page 3 59 Original Image page 3 52 Sharpness page 3 53 Background Density Adj page 3 54 Prevent Bleed through page 3 55 FAX TX Resolution refer to Fax Operation Guide Zoom page 3 56 Continuous Scan page 3 39 File Name Entry page 3 62 E mail Subject Body page 6 40 Job Finish Notice page 3 60 FTP Encrypted TX page 6 47 FAX Delayed Transmission refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX Direct Transmission refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX Polling RX refer to Fax Operation Guide Add Edit Shortcut page 3 22
51. See the leaflet supplied with the developer unit Replace the drum unit f to our specified drum unit See the leaflet supplied with the drum unit for details 10 4 Reference Page Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages E Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Error occurred at cassette Remove the indicated cassette Press Next gt to follow the instructions Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Failed to specify Job Failed to specify Job Accounting when Accounting processing the job externally The job is canceled Press End Failed to store job retention data The job is canceled Press End Finisher failure Contact your Service Representative Press the System Menu Counter key Adjustment Maintenance Service Setting and then Reset Disable Function Mode Press Execute to perform Reset Disable Function Mode Finisher tray is full of paper Is the acceptable storage Remove paper from the document capacity exceeded for the finisher tray document finisher tray Fuser unit is not installed Replace the fuser unit h 1 to our specified fuser unit See the leaflet supplied with the fuser unit for details When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses H Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Hi
52. Selects the paper in cassette 2 functions and machine Cassette 3 Selects the paper in cassette 3 the help text cannot be operation MP Tray Selects the paper in the multi purpose displayed in its entirety on a tray single screen Closes the Help screen and a returns to the original screen 3 28 Common Operations gt Canceling Jobs Canceling Jobs Cancel any print or send job being executed 1 Press the Stop key Stop Cancel a job When there is a job is being scanned e E ER EN E Caneling M 10 10 Scanned Pages 1 N Cancel Canceling will be displayed and the current job will be canceled GB0222_01 When there is a job printing or on standby e 10 10 0095 E doc0000952010092810 ce 2 30 i GB0717 00 2 Displays details for individual jobs Select the job you wish to cancel and press Delete NOTE The current print job is temporarily interrupted Continues without temporarily interrupting jobs being sent You can also cancel executing jobs and jobs on standby after checking their status Refer to Status Job Cancel on page 8 1 Canceling printing from a computer To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing do the following 1 Double click the printer icon 11 displayed on the taskbar at the bottom right of the Windows desktop to display a dialog box for the printer 2 Click the file for wh
53. and then in the image select High 1 If there is still no improvement change the value to E High 2 The altitude is 1500 m or Press the System Menu Counter key higher and dots appear in the Adjustment Maintenance Service image Setting Altitude Adjustment and then select High 1 If there is still no improvement change the value to High 2 10 11 Troubleshooting gt Solving Malfunctions Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Colors appear different than Did you choose appropriate image Select appropriate image quality 3 52 you anticipated quality for the original Have you loaded color copy paper into Load color copy paper into the paper the paper tray tray Run Calibration 9 26 Run Tone Curve Adjustment 9 26 When making copies 4 17 Adjust the color balance When printing from a computer Printer Driver Adjust the color using the printer driver USer Guide Perform Tone Curve Over long periods of use the effects of Run Tone Curve Adjustment 9 26 Adjustment is displayed the ambient temperature and humidity can cause color output hues to vary slightly The machine makes a The machine is adjusting itself Itis not clicking sound before starting a machine failure to print or after printing Cannot send via SMB Is the network cable connected Connect the correct network cable 2 10
54. compliant Max 5 0 m Shielded Preparation before Use gt Connecting Cables Connecting Cables Connecting LAN Cable The equipment can be connected with a network cable and used as a network printer or network scanner 1 Power Off Check that the indicators are off 2 Connect the machine 1 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface located on left side of the body SS 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub 3 Set up the machine Configure the network settings For details refer to Machine Setup Wizard on page 2 22 N 2 10 Preparation before Use gt Connecting Cables Connecting USB Cable The equipment can be connected with a USB cable and used as a printer or scanner in an environment where there is no network 4 Power Off Check that the indicators are off 2 Connect the machine 1 Connect the USB cable to the appropriate interface located on the left side of the body Sl 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC Connecting the Power Cable Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet Q IMPORTANT Only use the power cable that comes with the machine Preparation before Use gt Power On Off Power On Off Power On Power Off When the main power indicator is lit Recovery from sleep Main Power indicator Press the
55. must be set to Off Value Off On A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Enhanced WSD SSL Item Description Enhanced WSD SSL Set whether to use Kyocera s proprietary web services over SSL Value Off On A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON 9 21 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu IPSec Item Description Make this setting when you use IPSec Value Off On A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Secure Protocol Description SSL Select whether or not to use SSL Value Off On IPP Security Select the IPP security level This setup is available when SSL is On Value IPP IPP over SSL IPPoverSSL only HTTP Security Select the HTTP security level This setup is available when SSL is On Value HTTP HTTPS HTTPS Only LDAP Security Ext Address Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server Book This setup is available when SSL is On Value Off LDAPv3 TLS LDAP over SSL LDAP Security User Property A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON LDAP must be set to On in Protocol Detail on page 9 20 LAN Interface Item Description LAN Interface Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be
56. oo N LO e eo a o GB0766 00 Common Operations gt Favorites Number Select the item that you want to change 10 10 a 10 10 Name Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi Sending 1 2 Number Auto Owner Admin 1 V4 00 20 JL ce e a 5 Permission Select the item that you want to change 10 10 10 10 Permission Private oN Destination Address Book Function Type Wizard d Configures permission settings for favorites to determine how they are shared with other users GB0766 02 Destination Select the item that you want to change 10 10 S 10 10 Permission Private Address Book 2 Ext Address Book Functions One Touch Key Function Type Wizard d When the job type is Send or FAX selects the Destination Recall Method Address Entry E mail GB0766 02 Functions Select the item that you want to change 10 10 10 10 v File Format PDF Original Size Auto Destination Address Book Function Type Wizard 1 el If you selected wizard mode check the function and make changes as necessary LJ Original Orientation Top Edge on Top Leal Mixed Size Originals GB0766 02 Function Type 10 10 C 10 10 Cancel lt Back 0 4 el GB0766_02 GB0760 00 GB0305 00 GB0771 00 GB0773 00 GB
57. page 9 7 Access Level page 9 7 Account Name page 9 7 E mail Address page 9 7 Simple Login page 9 7 My Panel page 9 7 Group Name page 9 7 Group ID page 9 7 XIV Cassette MP Tray Settings page 9 8 Cassette 1 to 3 page Paper Size page 9 8 9 8 Media Type page 9 8 Multi Purpose Tray Paper Size page 9 8 page 9 8 Media Type page 9 8 Common Settings page 9 9 Default Screen page 9 9 Sound page 9 9 Buzzer page 9 9 Volume page 9 9 Key Confirmation page 9 9 Job Finish page 9 9 Ready page 9 9 Warning page 9 9 Key Confirmation USB Keyboard page 9 9 FAX Speaker Volume refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX Monitor Volume refer to Fax Operation Guide Original Settings page 9 9 Custom Original Size page 9 9 Original Auto Detect page 9 70 Paper Settings page 9 Custom Paper Size page 9 70 10 Media Type Settings page 9 70 Default Paper Source page 9 10 Paper Selection page 9 10 Media for Auto Color page 9 10 Media for Auto B amp W page 9 10 Special Paper Action page 9 11 XV Function Defaults page 9 12 File Format page 9 72 Original Orientation page 9 72 Collate Offset page 9 12 File Separation page 9 12 Scan Resolution page 9 12 Color Selection Copy page 9 12
58. securely Have the network settings for the Configure the TCP IP settings 9 18 equipment been configured properly properly Have the folder sharing settings been Check sharing settings and access 6 7 configured properly privileges under the folder properties Has the SMB protocol been set to Set the SMB protocol setting to On 2 23 On Has the Host Name been entered Check the name of the computer to 6 5 properly which data is being sent Has the Path been entered properly Check the share name for the shared 6 10 folder Has the Login User Name been Check the domain name and login 6 19 entered properly user name Has the same domain name been Delete the domain name and 6 19 used for the Host Name and Login backslash from the Login User User Name Name Has the Login Password been Check the login password 6 19 entered properly Have exceptions for Windows Firewall Configure exceptions for Windows 6 11 been configured properly Firewall properly 6 14 Do the time settings for the equipment Set the equipment domain server and domain server and data destination data destination computer to the same computer differ time Is the touch panel displaying Send Refer to Responding to Send Error 10 20 error You can also enter a full computer name as the host name for example pc001 abcdnet com You can also enter login user names in the following formats Domain name user name for exam
59. the trash can icon 9 66 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Restricting the Use of the Machine This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of pages available Set when Adding an Account see page 9 63 or Editing and Deleting Accounts see page 9 65 The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether Individual or Total is selected for Copier Printer Count on page 9 73 Restriction Items Individual selected for Copier Printer Count Copy Total Limits the total number of pages used for full color and black and white copying Copy Full Color Limits the number of pages used for full color copying Printer Total Limits the total number of pages used for color and black and white printing Printer Full Color Limits the number of pages used for color printing Scan Others Limits the number of pages scanned excludes copying FAX Transmission Limits the number of pages sent by fax This item is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed Total selected for Copier Printer Count Print Total Limits the total number of pages used for copying and printing Print Full Color Limits the number of pages used for full color printing Scan Others Limits the number of pages scanned excludes copying FAX Transmission Limits the number of pages sent by fax Only displayed w
60. 03 The Folder FTP Address 1 Enter Host Name Path Port Login User Name and Login Password 10 10 Inputs Limit64 Host Name Login User Name Cancel 1O S N LO Q eo a GB0709 02 Use v or A to scroll up and down For more information refer to Specifying a New PC Folder on page 6 19 N 6 26 Sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book 2 Confirm the connection status Ready to send 10 10 D 10 10 Host Name abc 2 Connection Test Path abc 1 2 ip Port 21 Login User Name el GB0709_03 Connected appears when connection to the destination is correctly established If Cannot connect appears review the entry Ready to send 10 10 oS Login User Name abc GB0709 03 7 Register the destination Select the item that you want to change 10 10 E Name Sales department 1 Address Number Auto Cancel E mail Address GB0078 02 GB0696 00 sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book Adding a Group Compile two or more contacts into a group Designations in the group can be added at the same time When adding a group a maximum of 50 groups can be added in the Address Book Before adding a group in the Address Book the contacts to be included in the group must be added first NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administ
61. 1 Date Timer E User Login EIL MEE Job Accounting E Unknown ID Job Reject GB0054_03 GB0434_00 NOTE You can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 9 37 for the default login user name and password 10 10 Login User Name Login Password Keyboard GB0723 00 t 2 Configure the function System Menu Counter 10 10 User List Simple login settings GB0435 02 Enabling Disabling User Login Administration gt page 9 35 N Adding a User gt page 9 37 Local User Authorization page 9 41 Editing and Deleting Users page 9 43 Simple Login gt page 9 46 Group Authorization gt page 9 52 Obtain Network User Property gt page 9 56 9 34 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Enabling Disabling User Login Administration This enables user login administration Select one of the following authentication methods Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the machine Network Authentication User authentication based on Authentication Server Use a user property stored in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 34 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Off LOCal User LIST Simpl
62. 10 Obtain NW User Property off GB0691 00 E GB0435 01 Use v or A to scroll up and down 2 Configure the function Server Name 10 10 Input 3 2 Limit 64 Server Name Port Name 1 displayName i Up to 64 characters can be entered GB0692 00 GB0057 34 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters 9 56 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Port 10 10 Server Name Port Name 1 displayName GB0692 02 Name 1 and Name 2 System Menu Counter 10 10 Server Name displayName GB0692 02 Up to 32 characters can be entered E mail Address 10 10 E mail Address mail AN Search Timeout eise GB0692 01 77 Na Up to 128 characters can be entered Search Timeout 10 10 mail 1 Search Timeout 60sec 2 2 E mail Address GB0692 01 i Wa 3 Press OK 9 57 Cancel OK l System Menu Counter 10 10 1 65535 ps 1 2 3 Input 11 Limit 32 Input4 Limit 1 28 System Menu Counter 10 10 5 255 1L 5 3 Cancel Ok el GB0439_01 GB0057_35 GB0057_36 GB0693_00 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Job Accounting Job accounting Manages the copy print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each
63. 23 Optional Function page 17 5 XIX Date Timer page 9 23 Date Time page 9 23 Date Format page 9 23 Time Zone page 9 23 Auto Panel Reset page 9 23 Auto Sleep page 9 23 Sleep Level page 9 24 Auto Error Clear page 9 24 Low Power Timer page 9 24 Panel Reset Timer page 9 24 Sleep Timer page 9 24 Interrupt Clear Timer page 9 24 Error Clear Timer page 9 24 Unusable Time refer to Fax Operation Guide Adjustment Maintenance page 9 25 Density Adjustment Copy page 9 25 age 9 25 pag Send Box page 9 25 Background Density Copy Auto page 9 25 Adj page 9 25 Send Box Auto page 9 25 Toner Save Level Copy page 9 25 EcoPrint page 9 25 pag Printer page 9 25 Auto Color Correction page 9 25 Correcting Black Line page 9 25 Display Brightness page 9 25 Color Registration page 9 25 Tone Curve Adjustment page 9 26 Drum Refresh page 9 26 Calibration page 9 26 Laser Scanner Cleaning page 9 26 DP Adjustment page 9 26 XX 1 Preface This chapter explains the following topics woie q sessetetaes 1 2 Safety Conventions in This Guide slseesssssssssesseeeenee nennen nnne nnne nnus nna nnne sn ssa sana ase ananas anas 1 2 maio aiio ER Eo mmm 1
64. 3 Frocautons TOR USO E 1 3 LOGON ANG ACY ION MMAUOMY C 1 9 Her MIN OVA OGD RN Em E 1 9 Energy Saving COMMON ulisreio M E EE 1 12 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function sseesseesssssssesssseseeee nnne nnne nennen nna rsen se rsen nsa a ns 1 12 AST RECON C ER 1 12 Energy Star ENERGY STARO Program ene rione ttu aee ent etie bae acti au deemesast dieu Ra eeu eia 1 12 ADOUL WG ecce net M c 1 13 Conventions in This Guide ssesssesssesseesseeeeeee nennen nnne nnn nnn nnne nsu ranis esa rasis asas rasa sanas ann ss 1 13 nginals and Paper SBS acra ena ae Tem 1 15 1 1 Preface gt Notice Notice Safety Conventions in This Guide The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user other individuals and surrounding objects and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine The symbols and their meanings are indicated below WARNING Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient A attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points CAUTION Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from A insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points Symbols The A symbol indicates that the rela
65. 4 hours Documents are deleted after 4 hours 1 day Documents are deleted after 1 day 1 week Documents are deleted after 1 week NOTE This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set Regardless of this function setting temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off 4 Display the screen 10 10 gt Send 2 IN lt gt System Menu Counter E A FAX D 1010 1 Address B Sub Address Box 3 GB0054 02 Job Box 1 1 Polling Box System Menu Counter Quick Copy Job Retention 32inh sY GB0290 00 Deletion of Job Retention Off GB0310 00 2 Select the time 10 10 p TS N Use V or AN to scroll up and down t GB0312 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer 9 12 6 sending This chapter explains the following topics sexui cm ste tussetetaar 6 2 Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC sssssssssssssssssssessseeeen nennen nnn nna n nna nnns nn nsn nnns 6 5 Checking What to Enter for Host Name cccccccccseccseeeceeeceecceeeceesaueecaeeseesaueeceeesaeesseessneesseesaaes 6 5 Checking What to Enter for Login User Name ccccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeaeeeeeeesaeesaeeseeeeaaes 6 6 S ic ulgsr Rep t peor dae M 6 7 aed qeBi ulm ie m
66. 9 16 eril EM M 9 18 Bul Rm ects sein EA E E N EE 9 23 Adjustment Maintenance cccccccccsececeeecceeeceeeeceeeecaeeecseeeeseeeeseeseeeeeeseueeseeeeseneees 9 25 Color Registration Procedure esses nennen nennen nnn nnn nnns 9 27 User Login AORIDISITRIOPE 22 5 nuhi vini usa tit imde VM sxgkauita bc bc abui SM Ui Uo GE t UN OM en eguu oU bs CF RU EU UA 9 33 First User Login Administration cece ccccceeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees nennen nnns 9 33 User LOGIN 5 CUMS PR ER 9 34 Enabling Disabling User Login Administration ccccccccceeccceeceeeecetaeeesaeeeeaeeeeaes 9 35 PONO T USOT cc 9 37 Local User Authorization M 9 41 SUI AMVC E T A A E E A E 9 42 Editing and Deleting Users ccccccccecceeeceeceeeeaeesaecceesaeecaeeeeeeceesaeeseeeasesaseseneneees 9 43 AIE EO QNO RE Eo mmm 9 46 Group AUtNOrZAION E NEE 9 52 Obtain Network User Property ccccccccseeceeeeceeeceeeceeeceueecueecaueceueeaueesueecseessueeeas 9 56 JOD ACCOUN er n e a a E T Ea EEN eaei 9 58 IES LION ACCOURUNG SETUD c 9 58 JOO ACCOUNTING SENGS NR T TT 9 60 Enabling Disabling Job Accounting cccceccccecccceececeececeeeeseeeeseeceseeeseeeseeeesaueesaes 9 61 LET LOTOUT MR MRE 9 62 Rdn ANAC OUNI seana 9 63 Editing and Deleting Acco
67. Box 5 6 Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents 5 11 Private Print 5 6 Proof and Hold 5 8 Job Finish Notice 3 60 Job Separator 2 2 JPEG TIFF Print 7 12 K Keyboard Layout 9 15 KPDL 11 24 L Language 9 5 Index 2 LAN Interface 9 22 LDAP Protocol Detail 9 20 LDAP Security 9 22 Legal Information 1 9 Legal Restriction on Copying 1 8 Legal Restriction on Scanning 1 8 Login 3 12 9 62 Logout 3 13 9 62 Low Power Mode 2 20 LPD Protocol Detail 9 20 M Machine Setup Wizard 2 22 Main Memory 9 23 Main Power Switch 2 4 Manual Setting IPv6 9 19 Margin 3 45 Measurement 9 14 Mixed Size Originals 3 35 Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1 11 Multi Purpose Tray 2 3 11 25 Loading Paper 3 5 Paper Size and Media Type 9 8 Multi Sending 6 23 N NetBEUI 11 25 Protocol Detail 9 20 NetWare 11 25 Setup 9 21 Network Preparing 2 8 Setup 2 22 9 18 Network Cable Connecting 2 10 Network Interface 2 4 2 9 O One Touch Key 6 33 Adding a Destination 6 33 Editing and Deleting 6 35 Open SSL License 1 9 Operation Panel 2 2 2 6 Option Card Authentication Kit 11 4 Document Finisher 11 3 Expansion Memory 11 3 FAX Kit 11 3 Gigabit Ethernet Board 11 5 Overview 11 2 Paper Feeder double cassette 11 3 Paper Feeder single cassette 11 3 Optional Function 11 5 Optional Memory 9 23 Option Interface 2 4 Original Image 3 52 Original Loaded Indicator 2 3 Original Orientation 3 34 Originals Custom Original Size 9 9 Loading Orig
68. Clerc Ac 11 23 OOX RE Tm Index 1 Vi Qu ick Guide Be sure to read Precautions for Use before using this machine To make copies P It copies Simply press the Start key to make copies You can also fine tune the copy settings by changing the 7 s paper size adjusting the density etc To print uj It prints You can print via a network or print a PDF file directly from USB memory Iu Eus d Printing P rint over What you want Copying with E Print via a the USB to do specific settings Removable USB network connection Memory Install the printer driver on your computer 2 14 Loading Paper 3 2 Loading Originals 3 7 Printing Documents Operation Copying 4 2 Stored in Printing from Applications 5 2 Removable USB Memory 7 2 Vil To send documents m It sends You can send scanned images via a network Or you can also store scanned images in USB memory Administrator tasks Saving hin you want Send as E mail weich poet Documents to o do USB Memory Connecting Cables Plug the USB memory Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Create a shared folder on the destination computer 6 7 Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys 6 15 Loading Originals 3 7 we a ow ow 9 Saving Documents Operation Sending 6 2 to USB Memory Scan to USB 7 5 fthe destination is not stored in the address book you can
69. Destination tes 6 33 Editing and Deleting One Touch Key seseeeesseeseeeneeenenennnen enne 6 35 Sending aiU pleno REO o DT ET 6 36 11 116 919 IZO qe R E M 6 37 PGC OOP ANON MR ERR m EM 6 39 E mail SubjecUBOGdy 2 u iini p anisan otc e stu vas Uns on aE amp atas dadus lu unum asse dE 6 40 A EMCI OO d P dr 6 41 yes Be 6 pg rH 6 42 Scanning using TWAIN e E 6 45 DOCUMEN BOX sro E eee cece 7 1 Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory cccccccecceeeceeeeeeeeeteeeseeeeaeeenes 1 2 Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB cc eccccceeececeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeenees 7 5 Removing USB Memory 1sssssdesessoseussepdytisio ma nest pne satu tetcadaneiacsstaneeatceatneastdseagcedectendiadeaneiiade 7 8 unctionis Tor Document BOX siecdicinccsedenecd acnvmseieaecumcmudatonencasine e aaa a a a 7 9 Bj J 7 10 Encrypted PDF Password ir taniinticssacacwitestra coun detiaceriislrecireseil ov d rca uinci 7 11 Maz A al a cad 0 epee er nc 7 12 biegen RNEITML Ott 7 13 SONNO o 4 ee ee RUE RR he ee eee ee eee oe 7 14 Status JOD E86 C M e 8 1 Checking Job Stats Rec 8 2 Details of the Status Screens sssessssessesssseeeee nenne nnne nenn
70. E Prevent Bleed through 1 sided 1 sided Off Collate MA GB0001 01 GB0002 02 Add Edi Shortcut Use VV or to scroll up and down 2 Adjusts the background density Auto 10 10 GB0061 00 Manual Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 u I l d e Press 1 to 5 Lighter Darker to adjust the background density GB0061 00 GB0062 00 3 54 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Prevent Bleed through Hide background colors and image bleed through when scanning thin original ABC b ABC o 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Prevent Bleed through 10 10 10 10 T l Copies es RN Paper m Zoom A Density ium Off w Selection Le 31 Sharpness Auto 100 Normal 0 ti 0 ee lu M m gt Ay Background Density Adj 9 i Duplex 4 4 Combine m Collate 4 Offset Prevent Bleed through 1 sided gt 1sided Off Collate CN Close GB0001 01 GB0002 02 Shortcut Use VV or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function 10 10 GB0835 00 e 3 55 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Zoom SED o l USB Reduce or enlarge original to send or store size Reproduces the original size
71. Empty Action Description Color Toner Empty Action Select whether printing is prohibited or the Print in Black and White setting is used for printing once the color toner runs out Value Stop printing Print in Black amp White Measurement Item Description Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions Value mm inch Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Keyboard Layout Item Description Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters Value QWERTY QWERTZ AZERTY USB Keyboard Type Item Description USB Keyboard Type Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use Value US English US English with Euro Copy Configures settings for copying functions Description Auto Paper Selection If Auto is selected for Paper Selection set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes Value Most Suitable Size Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original Same as Original Size Select paper that matches the size of the original regardless the zoom Auto Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected select whether automatic zoom reduce zoom is performed Value Off On Reserve Next Priority Once the scan of the original is complete the basic screen will be displayed and you can proceed to the next operation Value Off On
72. For details refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide 2 23 Preparation before Use gt COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail Sending E mail Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E mail attachments To use this function this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E mail attachments check the following e The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server A full time connection via a LAN is recommended e SMTP Settings Use COMMAND CENTER to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server e If limits have been set on the size of E mail messages it may not be possible to send very large E mails 1 Display the screen Start asic Printer Scanner AX Jobs Document Box a Advanced SMTP Login Menu Protocols TCP IP b AppleTalk NetBEUI 4 emen 1 b E mail Recipient 1 le General E mail Recipient 1 E mail Recipient 2 E mail Recipient 3 SMTP Protocol op 9 of SMTP Port Number 25 SMTP Server Name 3 SMTP Server Timeout 10 seconds Authentication Protocol on POP before SMT Authenticate asi Pops Account 1 POPS Account 2 POPS Account 3 mth ar 2 Configure the function Enter the correct settings in each field Description SMTP Protocol Enables or disab
73. LG ECAISSYS S TI G E C A 13 5 7 9 HFDBO0O24268 HFDBO024268 SULLO A HIN wrt onwrP PAA AH ODO ANOWUNM SD IGECA13579 IGECA13579 HFDBO2468 HFDBO24 68 wrt onownwr PaAAH OnRNOWUM tm 3 Enter the appropriate value 1 Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match If this is the O position registration for that color is not required For the illustration B is the appropriate value IGECA135 79 I HFDBO2 468 G E MTT A NGI ME 3 5 ONS Nowgam System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Print Chart Registration gt Detail 1 Vv GB0641_00 GB0642 00 9 28 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu 3 Select the chart to be corrected 10 10 GB0643 00 4 Press or to enter the values read from the chart 10 10 GB0644 00 e Press to increase the value from 0 to 9 To decrease press By pressing the value changes from 0 to alphabetic letters going from A to I To move in the reverse direction press You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the registration values for each chart 6 Press Start after all values have been entered Color registration begins 10 10 Cancel GB0643 00 7 Press OK after color registration is complete 9 29 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Detailed S
74. OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE MFP KYOCERA MITA AMERICA INC KYOCERA MITA CANADA LTD 225 Sand Road 6120 Kestrel Road Fairfield New Jersey Mississauga Ontario L5T 1S8 07004 0008 USA Canada 1 7 Preface gt Notice Legal Restriction on Copying Scanning It may be prohibited to copy scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner Copying Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low It may not be limited to these items Do not knowingly copy scan the items that are not to be copied scanned Paper money Bank note Securities Stamp Passport Certificate Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying scanning of other items not mentioned above 1 8 Preface gt Legal and Safety Information Legal and Safety Information Legal Information Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Kyocera Mita Corporation is prohibited Regarding Trade Names e PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation e KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation Microsoft MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S A and or other countries e PCL is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Compa
75. Original Size GB0096_00 Cancel Add Edi Shortcut GB0098 00 Use v or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the storing size Same as Original Size 10 10 Same as i Inch i Others gt 7 NF d GB0132 00 Document Box gt Functions for Document Box Metric inch or Others Same as Inch Original Size 1 Others gt zd Select the desired size 10 10 OK i GB0132 01 2 Ready to store in Box Cancel Use VV or to scroll up and down 10 10 GB0133 00 Document Box gt Functions for Document Box 7 16 8 Status Job Cancel This chapter explains the following topics CRE KNO JOD US O Details of the Status Screens eint dent rr ameet spe e nana dena rk on ara da exe Rar on eue RU sas uua Sbwnnedtidactewdewnenss CAME CIING 2 OWS HIIS OR e Sending the Log rt SEN NE rm CUI Me DES inai ON Mr P Automatic Log History Transmission ssssssssssssssssssseseeeee nennen nnne nnne nnne nnne nennen nnn ns Manual L g History TransmlsSlQODl zssseucecdts staat eouucS sannio ndanin 2d bU ut Len Rute drAq uaa pk WI ECRIRE dU Dau ZU aieiaa Sewing zebets eq E ee cne qe BI o Rorii m H 9
76. Power key When the main power indicator is off Turn the main power switch on Q IMPORTANT When turning off the main power switch do not turn on the main power switch again immediately Wait more than 5 seconds and then turn on the main power switch When not turning off the main power switch sleep Main Power indicator Press the Power key The Power key light will go out and the Main Power indicator will light up 2 12 Preparation before Use gt Power On Off When turning off the main power switch Note that when the main power switch is turned off the machine will be unable to automatically receive print data from computers or faxes 1 Press the Power key Main Power indicator Check that the indicators are off Verify that the Power key light has gone out and that the Main Power indicator is lit up 2 Turn the main power switch off NOTE When the Processing indicator or Memory indicator is lit up the machine is operating Turning off the main power switch while the machine is operating may cause it to malfunction In case of not using the machine for an extended period of time A CAUTION If this machine will be left unused for an extended period e g overnight turn it off at the main power switch If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time e g vacation remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution If the optional Fax kit is installed note
77. Raw Port Protocol Detail 9 20 Recycled Paper 1 12 11 17 Regarding Trade Names 1 9 Replacing Staples 10 5 Report Print 9 5 Accounting Report 9 6 Font List 9 5 Network Status 9 5 Service Status 9 6 Status Page 9 5 Resolution 11 19 11 20 Restart 9 4 Result Report Settings 9 6 Right Cover 2 2 S Safety Conventions in This Guide 1 2 Saturation 4 18 Scan Resolution 3 51 Secure Protocol 9 22 Send as E mail 6 2 11 25 E mail Subject Body 6 40 sending 6 1 Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 6 5 Send as E mail 6 2 Send to Folder SMB FTP 6 2 sending E mail 2 24 Sending Size 6 37 Send Settings Color TIFF Compression 9 16 Default Screen 9 16 Dest Check before Send 9 15 Entry Check for New Dest 9 15 Send and Forward 9 16 Sharpness 3 53 Shortcuts Editing and Deleting 3 24 Registering 3 22 Using 3 25 Sleep 2 21 Slit Glass 2 2 SMB Client Transmission Protocol Detail 9 20 SMTP 11 26 SMTP E mail TX Protocol Detail 9 20 SNMP Protocol Detail 9 20 SNMP v3 Protocol Detail 9 20 Solving Malfunctions 10 8 sound 9 9 Specifications Document Finisher 11 22 Document Processor 11 21 Environmental Specifications 11 22 Machine 11 18 Paper Feeder double cassette 11 21 Paper Feeder single cassette 11 21 Printer 11 19 11 20 Scanner 11 20 Staple 3 48 Status 11 26 Status Job Cancel 8 1 Status Page 11 26 Storing Size 7 14 Subnet Mask 11 26 Setup 9 18 Symbols 1 2 system Menu 9 2 T TCP IP 11 26 TCP
78. Register the favorite ERE 10 10 Name Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi Sending Number 01 GB0781 00 10 10 10 10 01 Ls Sending Job E mail 15 G ID Card Copy 1 1 16 G Paper Saving Copy e E H Scan to PC Addreess Entry Cancel Delete uU GB0782 00 GB0779 00 Select the favorite you wish to delete Common Operations gt Favorites Using Favorites Call up settings from a favorite 1 Display the screen Favorites 2 Select a favorite 10 10 ID Card Copy Paper Saving Copy Scan to PC Addre ess Entry Lm s Bow Lm Scan to PC Addre Scan to E mail A Scan to E mail A ss Book ddress Entry ddress Book GB0056 00 When using the wizard mode 1 The registered screens are displayed in order Make the desired settings 10 10 GB0016 99 Input Others Limit 128 3 mma ABc af V a D s et lt c o E GB0057 99 2 Confirm the settings and start the job 10 10 Use or to serol up and down Paper Selection Auto Zoom 10096 Density Normal 0 GB0820_00 NOTE To edit the settings press lt Back and make changes as desired Common Operations gt Favorites When using the program mode Select a favorite to call up registered settings Press the Start key to start the job Start 3 21 Common Operations gt Shortc
79. SY Sw I Color Selection Paper S Zoom M Density Full Color Selection i Original Image Auto 100 Normal 0 a 2 Text Photo a 9I 5 g EcoPrint he Duplex Combine m Collate d d Offset MUE AgJusurierit 1 sided 21 sided Off Collate GBO0001 01 GB0002 01 Add Edi Shortcu ani Use v or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 ri L e GB0045 00 Copying gt Copying Functions Hue Adjustment Adjust the color hue of images Make adjustments such as adjusting red to a strong yellow red or yellow to a strong green yellow to make more creative copies Original vvYvv AAAAAAAA 000 A Adjust yellow to more green Adjust yellowish red to more yellow adjust blue to more magenta adjust bluish cyan to more blue NOTE This feature is used with full color and auto color copying These adjustments are especially useful on rich color images 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Sor Im Copies Functic Ey e Color Selection AI Paper z Zoom M Density Full Color Selection eh Original Image Auto m Normal 0 Text Photo Duplex Combine C EE 54 L Offset 1 sided gt 1 sided Collate a t i Favor
80. See aiandi aani 9 61 LOGI BOG o 1 SNR RN E m 9 62 vele gek inpaiecoin MAMEMRRRTRCPMETT 9 63 Edi ng and Deleting ACCOUNTS 2x22 rkao Dnrcda exa sencud ERE Z EEC2 WM 2 d vdba sk pda a suia C bars aA La Ra A RERO A KR Nd ada 9 65 Restricting the Use of the Machine cccccescccsscecssceceeceseuseceusensuseneesensueeneeseseueenesensueensesensseesageess 9 67 Counting the Number of Pages Printed sesenta nnns nane nenas 9 69 Prning an Accounting ReDOELU iiaasen atr sara sninn anea ARE exa ava sie EUR Vu dale La s sudo Va aaar be 9 71 Job Accounting Default Setting cc cccccceccsssecneececesecseseeseueeeeseeeeaesensesecsesessaseseueeseueeseueeeeesessneessags 9 73 Unknown Login User Name Job leeeseeesssessseesseeee nennen nnne nn hn nne nnne rasa ar ia rase rase ananas 9 75 9 1 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu System Menu Configure settings related to overall machine operation Operation Method The system menu is operated as follows 1 Display the screen lt gt System Menu Counter Configure the function System Menu Counter 10 10 fe User Login Job Accounting YN E Printer Displays available 4 5 b System functions Scrolls up and down when the list of values GB0054 03 Date Timer cannot be displayed in its entirety on
81. Store file screen in Document Box shows the commonly used functions By pressing Functions other selectable functions will be shown as a list Use v or A to select the function When printing from USB memory What do you want to do Reference Page Specify the paper size and type Paper Selection gt page 3 41 Collate the output documents in page order Offset the output documents by set Collate Offset gt page 3 43 Print on both sides of the paper Duplex gt page 7 10 Change the paper output Paper Output P page 3 42 Staple in the output documents Staple gt page 3 48 Change the color mode Color Selection page 3 59 Add margins white space Margin gt page 3 45 Send notice by e mail when a job is complete Job Finish Notice page 3 60 Suspend the current job and override it to give a new job top priority Priority Override page 3 63 Password protect a PDF file Encrypted PDF Password P page 7 11 Set the image size resolution when printing a JPEG or TIFF file JPEG TIFF Print gt page 7 12 Print an XPS file so that it fits the paper size XPS Fit to Page page 7 13 When storing a document to USB memory What do you want to do Reference Page Select the file format for images being stored File Format page 3 57 Automatically scan 2 sided originals 2 sided Book Original gt page 3 37 Set the resolution at which to scan originals Scan Resolution gt
82. To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server Network Authentication must be selected for the authentication method and NTLM or Kerberos must be selected as the server type in Enabling Disabling User Login Administration on page 9 35 Server Name Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address up to 64 characters Port Set the LDAP port number or use the default port 389 Name 1 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the LDAP server up to 32 characters Name 2 E mail Address Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e mail address from the LDAP server up to 128 characters Search Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds from 5 to 255 seconds fusing Active Directory of Windows the server name may be same as the server name entered in the network authentication If using Active Directory of Windows displayName of Attribute may be used as Name 1 Name 2 can be left out When you assign displayName in Name 1 and department in Name 2 and if the value of displayName is Mike Smith and the value of department is Sales in Active Directory of Windows the user name appears as Mike Smith Sales If using Active Directory of Windows mail of Attribute may be used as E mail Address 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 34 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10
83. a single Screen System Menu Counter 10 10 SSS Format Displays available Date Time 10 10 2010 10 10 SSS 09 D0 Osaka Sapporo UD UD Zone Te functions s m i Ea Return to the previous screen 10 10 Selecting a value it to be 12 00 International Date Line West accepted 11 00 Samoa gt 1 24 11 00 Universal Coordinated Time 11 5 Returns to the original 10 00 Hawaii N screen without making Accepts the settings any changes NOTE and exits In order to change settings that require administer privileges you must log in with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 9 37 for the default login user name and password Enter login user name and password 10 10 Login User Name Keyboard Login Password Keyboard GB0723 00 Refer to System Menu Settings on the following page and configure as needed 9 2 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu System Menu Settings system Menu include Item Description Reference Page Quick Setup Wizard The Quick Setup Wizard configures fax and Energy Saver settings 3 26 Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel 9 5 Report Print reports to check the machine settings and status Default settings 9 5 for printing the result reports can also be configured Cou
84. account Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations e Manageability of up to 100 individual accounts e Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits between 0 and 99999999 for security Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined Restricting the print counter in one page increments up to 9 999 999 copies Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined First Job Accounting Setup Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup For details about the configuration method refer to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 60 4 Enable job accounting 10 10 GB0462 00 2 Add an account System Menu Counter 10 10 Q LS Sales department 00000001 fit 1 1 GB0473_00 3 Log out Logout 9 58 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 4 Other users login for operations Enter the account ID 10 10 Enter the account ID Check Login Counter GB0725 00 t 9 59 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Job Accounting Settings 1 Display the screen Use V or AN to scroll up and down t System Menu Counter E a p 3 022 System ma cystem Menu Counter 10 10 t Esootertimer
85. all GB0183 00 Display Key Detail Icons that indicate the job type B Sending Job FAX m Sending Job Folder SMB FTP lt 4 Sending Job E mail Sending Job Application m Sending Job Mixed Multiple Menu Pressing this key displays Priority Override This function allows you to give a particular fax job priority Select the fax job you wish to send immediately and then press Menu followed by Priority Override Cancel Select the job you want to cancel from the list and press this key Press for the job for which you wish to display detailed information Status of job 5 Sending t3 Sending Waiting A job for which immediate transmission was specified is waiting for transmission to start LI Pausing the job or error Canceling the job F The status before starting sending such as during scanning originals Close Closes the Send Job Status screen This function is displayed when the optional fax is installed Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job Status Store Job Status screen Status Job Cancel 10 10 0016 p doc0000162010082913 D GB0184 00 Display Key Details Icons that indicate the job type Storing Job Scan E Storing Job Printer B Storing Job FAX Cancel Select the job you want to cancel from the list and press this key Press for the job for which you wish to display detailed info
86. and Hold stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Proof and Hold Print job Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Proof and Hold Print job using the printer driver NOTE RAM disk mode must be enabled RAM disk mode can be used when optional memory has been installed For details refer to RAM Disk Setting on page 9 23 Setting the Number of Stored Jobs To maintain free space on the RAM disk you can set the maximum number of stored jobs 4 Display the screen 10 10 gt System Menu Counter IE send 2 E Document Box i in System Menu Counter 10 10 Address B Sub Address Box nS Box System Menu Counter BEDV eas Copy Job Retention BEDV eas Deletion of Job Retention GB0054 02 GB0290 00 GB0310 00 2 Enter the maximum number of stored jobs 10 10 GB0311 00 You can enter any number between 0 and 50 G NOTE If you enter a value of 0 zero you cannot use the Proof and Hold function 5 8 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer Printing and Deleting the Document You can print and delete documents stored in the Proof and Hold box 1 Display the screen Document Box ssts SsSSCsid Box 10 10 Removable Memory J Document Box Document Box 10 10 Sub Address Box Address ioe Private Print Do Proof and Hold el GB0051_00 GB0650 00 2 Select th
87. as one job Originals will be scanned continuously until you press Finish Scan 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Continuous Scan Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 opy m Copies 1 ccA X es ee ee jg Saturation Paper N Zoom all Density 0 Selection e ness iz Margin 2 Auto 100 Normal 0 iis uud A Mr Continuous Scan va Duplex Combine Collate b UEP Ofiset a E ee Ea pase Auto image Rotation 1 sided gt 1 sided Off Collate x GB0001 01 GB0002 03 Add Edit Shortcu Use VV or to scroll up and down 2 Select the function Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 GB0043 00 e 3 Scan the originals NNNNNN art key to start scanning Once the original has been scanned load the next original and press the Start key Use the same procedure to scan any remaining originals 3 39 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Finish scanning 2 10 10 Scanned Pages Cancel Finish Scan d Start copying sending or storing 3 40 GB0222 00 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Paper Selection o USB Select the cassette or multi purpose tray that contains the required paper size NOTE Specify in advance the size and type of the
88. automatically executed and the screen to enter the Account ID appears To continue the operation enter the Account ID GB0462_00 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Login Logout If job accounting is enabled an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine Login 4 Enter the account ID 10 10 Enter the account ID If this screen is displayed during operations enter the account ID NOTE If you entered a wrong character press the Clear key and enter the account ID again If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID a warning beep will sound and login will fail Enter the correct account ID By pressing Check Counter you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number of pages scanned 2 Log in 10 10 Enter the account ID Counter a When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears If user login administration is enabled the screen to enter the login user name and password appears Enter a login user name and password to login Refer to Login Logout on page 3 12 If the user has already registered the account information the account ID entry would be skipped Refer to Adding a User on page 9 37 Logout When the operations are complete press the Logout key to return to the account ID entry screen Logout 9 62 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Adding an Account This section explains
89. combined total of up to 5 FTP and SMB destination folders You can register the entered information in the Address Book by pressing Menu and then Add to Address Book 6 20 sending gt Specifying Destination 5 Accept the destinations 10 10 Login User Name Menu Cancel Destinations can be changed later Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6 22 N o o co N o a o 6 21 sending gt Specifying Destination Checking and Editing Destinations Check and edit a selected destination 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Specifying Destination on page 6 15 specify the destination Ready to send 10 10 ay Nact i e 3 BBB bbb abc com Guu check 1 One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book p i lt GB0055_02 E mail Folder FAX 2 Check and edit the destination Deletes the selected destination 10 10 mS m ot Adds a new destination BBB bb abc com Scrolls up and down when the list of destinations cannot be displayed in its entirety on a single screen GB0105 00 Displays details for the destinations New E mail addresses and PC folders can be edited if they have been specified 6 22 sending gt Specifying Destination Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending You can specify destinations that combine e mail addresses folders SMB or F
90. d Allows you to search for an account name and sorts results You can specify an account name by account ID by pressing the Quick No Search key 2 Editthe account Account Name 10 10 2 Input 8 Limit 32 Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 Print Total Off Print Full Color Off GB0478 00 GB0057 65 Account ID System Menu Counter 10 10 10 10 Account Name Section 01 1 0 99999999 ccoun 0000001 EM sooo Print Total Off Print Full Color Off GB0478 00 T GB0476_00 9 65 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Restriction System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 oui Counter Limit Print Total Off Reject Usage Print Full Color Off 2 Cancel el System Menu Counter 10 10 GB0478_00 GB0474_00 C7 NE el Scan Others Off Use V or A to scroll up and down FAX Transmission off d For details refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 67 GB0478 01 3 Register the account System Menu Counter 10 10 Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 Print Total Off Print Full Color Cancel GB0478 00 To delete System Menu Counter Job Q b fij Sales department 00000001 1 t GB0473 00 Menu Select the account name you wish to delete and press Delete
91. destination System Menu Counter 10 10 8 E mail abc def com ce 1 1 Cancel GB0581_01 Status Job Cancel gt Sending the Log History Automatic Log History Transmission This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been logged 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8 7 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 Send Log History Off 1 1 Destination Job Log Subject GB0578 00 2 Select the function System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 B3 PE OK T Back D d Press On and enter the number of jobs in the log history print You can enter any number between 1 and 16 GB0579 00 GB0580 00 Manual Log History Transmission You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually 1 2 Display the screen Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8 7 display the screen Send the log history System Menu Counter 10 10 Send Log History Auto Sending Destination E mail Job Log Subject GB0578 00 8 9 Status Job Cancel gt Sending the Log History Setting E mail Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E mail 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8 7 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 S
92. for printing 6 Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box 3 Start printing m Print Printer N FEE Status Error 1 documents waiting Comments and Forms Type Document and Markups X Print Range Preview Composite oa pacc i Current view Current pag Pages 1 Subset All pages in range Reverse pages Page Handling Copies 1 Collate 297 01 Page Scaling Shrink to Printable Area M 4 Auto Rotate and Center F Choose paper source by PDF page size Use custom paper size when needed Print to file Units mm Zoom 96 1 1 ems C Click OK button NOTE Click the tabs on the print settings screen and configure the print settings as necessary For more information refer to the Printer Driver User Guide Printing gt Printing from Applications Printer driver print settings screen The printer driver print settings screen allows you to configure a variety of print related settings For more information refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on the DVD Properties Print size Media type A4 10056 E Unspecified m Source Destination Auto source selection MA Printer default Page Sizes Orientation Duplex A Portrait A Print on both sides E Landscape n loi Rotated Copies Color 1 Full color Black amp White 3 V Collate Z EcoPrint a kaocen 5 7 anoal
93. gt gt A3 B5 gt gt B4 122 A4 gt gt B4 A5 gt gt B5 11596 B4 gt gt A3 B5 gt gt A4 10096 86 A3 gt gt B4 A4 gt gt B5 81 B4 gt gt A4 B5 gt gt A5 70 A3 gt gt A4 B4 gt gt B5 50 25 Min Copying gt Copying Functions Zoom Entry Specify the image size in 1 increment between 25 400 of the original 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 EN v 1j E ES F _ Paper H Density r Selection Auto Normal 0 um Duplex am Collate 2 _ Offset 1 sided 1 sided Off Collate GB0001 01 2 Select the function Auto 10 10 100 Auto Standard Zoom Zoom Entry gt d GB0005 00 Standard Zoom 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 115 B4 gt gt A3 B5 gt gt A4 2 100 Auto Standard Zoom 100 2 3 86 A3 gt gt B4 A4 gt gt B5 Zoom Entry gt a 81 B4 gt gt A4 B5 gt gt A5 Use VV or A to scroll up and down t GB0005 00 Select the zoom level GB0006 01 Copying gt Copying Functions Zoom Entry 10 10 Standard Zoom 100 Auto Zoom Entry gt GB0005 00 TES m Enter the magnification 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color amp mu 25 400 REA OK d GB0007 00 Copyin
94. in the open position 3 7 Common Operations gt Loading Originals Loading Originals in the Document Processor The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals Both sides of two sided originals are scanned Originals Supported by the Document Processor Weight 45 to 160 g m duplex 50 to 120 g m Size Maximum A3 to Minimum A5 Maximum Ledger to Minimum Statement R Capacity Plain paper 80 g m Colored paper Recycled paper 50 sheets Mixed size originals 30 sheets Thick paper 157 g m7 25 sheets Thick paper 120 g m 33 sheets Art paper 1 sheet Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor e Soft originals such as vinyl sheets e Transparencies such as OHP film e Carbon paper Originals with very slippery surfaces Originals with adhesive tape or glue Wet originals Originals with correction fluid which is not dried e irregularly shaped non rectangular originals Originals with cut out sections e Crumpled paper Originals with folds Straighten the folds before loading Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam Originals bound with clips or staples Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls wrinkles or creases before loading Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam How to Load Originals Q IMPORTANT Before loading originals be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table Originals left on the or
95. it is restricted by User Authorization or Job Accounting Press End Cannot staple at the specified position Have you selected a position that cannot be stapled Press Paper Selection to select the available paper Press Continue to print without using Staple function Cannot staple the following paper Did you select a paper size type that cannot be stapled Press Paper Selection to select the available paper Press Continue to print without using Staple function Cassette failure Contact your Service Representative Press the System Menu Counter key Adjustment Maintenance Service Setting and then Enable Repaired Unit Press Execute to perform Enable Repaired Unit Check the document processor Is the document processor open Close the document processor Is the top cover of the document processor open Close the top cover of the document processor Check waste toner box Is the waste toner box full Replace the waste toner box 10 4 The waste toner box is not installed correctly Set it correctly When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses D Error Message Developer unit is not installed C IMI Y IK Drum unit is not installed C IM Y K Checkpoints 10 14 Corrective Actions Replace the developer unit g to our specified developer unit
96. je Name Group Profile Enabled Action o BranchCache Content Retrieval HTTP In BranchCache Content Retr All o BranchCache Hosted Cache Server HTT BranchCache Hosted Cach All Inbound Rules p Allow Allow b Monitoring W riter by Prorile gt BranchCache Peer Discovery WSD In BranchCache Peer Discove All Allow o Y Fit Si gt connect to a Network Projector TCP In Connect to a Network Proje Private Allow ya o Connect to a Network Projector TCP In Connect to a Network Proje Domain Allow W Filter by Group gt No No No No No connect to a Network Projector WSD Ev Connect to a Network Proje Private No Allow No No No No View connect to a Network Projector WSD Ev Connect to a Network Proje Domain Allow m connect to a Network Projector WSD Ev Connect to a Network Proje Private Allow a ne Connect to a Network Projector WSD Ev Connect to a Network Proje Domain Allow ux Export List connect to a Network Projector WSD In Connect to a Network Proje All Allow Help core Networking Destination Unreacha Core Networking All Yes Allow n ToU RENE Rule Type Select the type of firewall rule to create Steps amp Rule Type What type of rule would you like to create Protocol and Ports Program Rule that cantmls cannectians far a nraram U i Suan rou
97. more vivid color NOTE This feature is used with full color and auto color copying 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 mE to copy Full Color 10 10 Copies la T Saturation Paper Zoom m Density 0 q2 Selection fz Margin Auto mn m 0 B 2 Continuous Scan aa Duplex Combine gig Collate A Offset TRE Image Rotation 1 sided 1 sided Off Collate GB0001 01 GB0002 03 Shortcu Use V or to scroll up and down 2 Select the function GB0070 00 E Press 3 or 3 Grayish Vivid to adjust the color saturation Copying gt Copying Functions Auto Image Rotation When original and paper source size are the same but their orientation is different rotate image 90 degrees 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 OpY l Copies 1 _ Paper LO Zoom Density Selection LL npud Auto 100 Normal 0 ee ee IT Duplex Combine a Collate b c Offset 1 sided 3 1 sided Of Collate 2 Select the function Ready to copy Full Color Off aa E 10 10 el Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Saturation Off iff Margin Continuous Scan Auto Image Rotation ta GB0001 01 GB0002 03 Add E
98. nl NORWAY KYOCERA MITA Norge Olaf Helsetsvei 6 NO 0694 Oslo Phone 47 22 627 300 Fax 47 22 627 200 www kyoceramitanorge no PORTUGAL KYOCERA MITA Portugal LDA Rua do Centro Cultural 41 PT 1700 106 Lisboa Phone 351 21 843 6780 Fax 351 21 849 3312 www kyoceramita pt SOUTH AFRICA KYOCERA MITA South Africa Pty Ltd 527 Kyalami Boulevard Kyalami Business Park ZA 1685 Midrand Phone 27 11 540 2600 Fax 27 11 466 3050 www kyoceramita co za SPAIN KYOCERA MITA Espana S A Avda Manacor No 2 ES 28290 Las Matas Madrid Phone 34 91 631 83 92 Fax 34 91 631 82 19 www kyoceramita es SWEDEN KYOCERA MITA Svenska AB Esbogatan 16B SE 164 75 Kista Phone 46 8 546 550 00 Fax 46 8 546 550 10 www kyoceramita se UNITED KINGDOM KYOCERA MITA UK Ltd 8 Beacontree Plaza Gillette Way Reading Berkshire RG2 OBS Phone 44 1189 311 500 Fax 44 1189 311 108 www kyoceramita co uk KYOCERA MITA WORLDWIDE JAPAN KYOCERA MITA Corporation Head Office 2 28 1 Chome Tamatsukuri Chuo ku Osaka 540 8585 Japan Phone 81 6 6764 3555 Fax 81 6 6764 3980 www kyoceramita com USA KYOCERA MITA America INC Head office 225 Sand Road P O Box 40008 Fairfield New Jersey 07004 0008 USA Phone 1 973 808 8444 Fax 1 973 882 6000 www kyoceramita com us KYOCERA CORPORATION JAPAN KYOCERA CORPORATION Corporate Headquarters 6 Takeda Tobadono cho Fushimi ku Kyoto
99. page 3 51 Adjust the density Density gt page 3 50 Add a file name to the job to easily check its status File Name Entry page 3 62 Specify the original size Original Size gt page 3 32 Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction Original Orientation gt page 3 34 Scan mixed size originals Mixed Size Originals page 3 35 Change the size at which to store an image Storing Size gt page 7 14 Change the color mode for images being stored Color Selection page 3 59 Select original image type for best results Original Image P page 3 52 Emphasize the outline of texts or lines Blur the image outline Sharpness page 3 53 Darken or lighten the background i e the area with no text or images of originals Background Density Adjust gt page 3 54 Prevent bleed through for 2 sided originals Prevent Bleed through page 3 55 Enlarge or shrink originals according to the storing size Zoom page 3 56 Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job Continuous Scan page 3 39 Send notice by e mail when a job is complete Job Finish Notice page 3 60 Document Box gt Functions for Document Box Duplex Print a document 1 sided or 2 sided Select the original binding orientation and desired final binding orientation 2 sided Print a 2 sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the left
100. panel When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses I Error Message The cover is open Checkpoints Is there any cover which is open Corrective Actions Close the cover indicated on the touch panel Reference Page The phone receiver is off the hook Put down the receiver The slit glass requires cleaning This memory is not formatted Is the removable memory formatted by this machine 10 19 Clean the slit glass using the cleaning cloth supplied with the document processor Perform Format on this machine Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages Error Message Corrective Actions Reference Page Toner is empty C M Y K Replace the toner container Toner is running out C M Y K It is almost time to replace the toner container Obtain a new toner container Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Unknown Toner Installed Is the installed toner container We will not be liable for any damage our own brand caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine Unknown Toner Installed PC Does the installed toner Install the specified container C IM Y K container s regional specification match the machine s Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Warning low memory F Job cannot be started Try again later
101. paper loaded in the cassette refer to Cassette MP Tray Settings on page 9 8 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Paper Selection Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Copies a 31 Paper OW Zoom d Density Selection SR UNE 100 Normal 0 m es um o ee L Duplex Combine gp Collate L L gt Offset 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off Collate Y Favorites GB0001 01 2 Select the paper source 10 10 GB0004 00 xv Cancel If Auto is selected the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically 2 Cassette 2 and 3 Cassette 3 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed M indicates the MP tray When selecting MP tray specify the paper size and the media type The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below Paper Size Metric Select from A3 A4 R A4 A5 R A6 R B4 B5 R B5 B6 R Folio or 216 x 340 mm inch Select from Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Executive or Oficio Il others Select from 8K 16K R 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Hagaki Oufukuhagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 or Custom Size Entry Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes Inch models X 5 83 to 17 in 0 01 increments Y 3 86 to 11 69 in 0
102. pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing up to 200 C or 392 F Preprinted Paper Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 11 The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing It must be resistant to silicone oil as well Do not use paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars 11 16 Appendix gt Paper Recycled Paper Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 17 however its whiteness may be considered separately NOTE Before purchasing recycled paper in volume try testing a sample to ensure that the print quality Coated Paper Coated paper is created by treating the surface of the base paper with a coating that provides higher printing quality than plain paper Coated paper is used for particularly high quality printing The surface of high quality or medium quality paper is coated with special agents that improve ink adhesion by making the paper surface smoother These agents are used either to coat both sides of the paper or just one side The coated side appears slightly glossy Q IMPORTANT When printing on coated paper in very humid environments ensure that the paper is kept dry as moisture may cause sheets to stick together when they are fed into the machine If printing in very humid environments set coated paper for one sheet each 11 17 Appendix gt Specifications Specificati
103. plugged into the machine When displaying an image Have you selected 200x 100dpi Normal Select a scan resolution other than 3 51 sent from the machine on the or 200x400dpi Super for the scan 200x100dpi Normal or 200x400dpi PC an image size is shrunk resolution Super when sending an image vertically or horizontally Printouts have lines Is the slit glass dirty Clean the slit glass 10 6 ABC Run Laser Scanner Cleaning 9 26 123 Dirt on the top edge or back Check interior of the transfer unit Open the right cover and check for of the paper toner on the paper transfer unit Clean a RM interior of the unit using a soft dry lint free cloth Part of the image is Have the developer unit and drum unit Load the developer unit and drum unit periodically faint or shows been loaded properly properly white lines Open and then close the right cover Run Drum Refresh 9 26 If you experience frequent problems 2 4 turn the cassette heater switch on Print on the back of the sheet Set Prevent Bleed through to On 3 55 is visible on the front Skewed color printout Run Calibration 9 26 Run Color Registration 9 27 ABC 10 10 Troubleshooting gt Solving Malfunctions Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Offset occurs Run Drum Refresh 9 26 Press the System Menu Counter key Adjustment Maintenance Service Setting MC and in
104. screen on page 8 5 and Scheduled Job screen on page 8 5 GB0182 00 Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job Status Details of the Status Screens Print Job Status Screen Status Job Cancel 10 10 5 23 SS 0089 FE doc0000892010092514 GB0182 00 Print Jobs 1 2 34 6 Item Key Detail Icons that indicate the job type Copy job Printer job ea Job from Document Box A FAX reception 7 E mail reception Report List 4 Data from removable memory Cancel Select the job to be canceled from the list and press this key Press for the job for which you wish to display detailed information Pause All Print Jobs Pauses all the printing jobs By pressing this key again the printing jobs will be resumed Status of job Cm Printing ci Printing priority override Cal Printing interrupt copying a Print Waiting Print Waiting priority override Eg Print Waiting interrupt copying LL Pausing print job or error Canceling the job E The status before starting to print 9 The status before starting to print priority override 4 The status before starting to print interrupt copying Di Printing has been suspended due to priority override or interrupt copy operation Close Closes the Print Job Status screen Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job Status Send Job Status screen 10 10 0005 pass 0123456 c Process
105. send by entering the address directly viii To send a FAX A It faxes As well as sending a FAX via the telephone lines you can also send a FAX via a network SN NOTE For more information on setting up and sending a FAX refer to the FAX Operation Guide Administrator tasks Mia you want Send a FAX FAX directly from a computer Connect the modular cord for the telephone line to this machine Selection of Telephone Line Inch version only Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Install the Network FAX Driver on your computer SERM A RD ONIS vens in Loading Paper 3 2 Operation FAX Operation Network FAX Operation For more information refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide If the destination is not stored in the address book you can send the FAX by entering the address directly Copies page 4 3 Paper Selection page 3 47 Zoom page 4 5 Density page 3 50 Duplex page 4 8 Combine page 4 72 Collate Offset page 3 43 Functions Original Size page 3 32 Original Orientation page 3 34 Mixed Size Originals page 3 35 Paper Output page 3 42 Staple page 3 48 Color Selection page 3 59 Original Image page 3 52 EcoPrint page 4 75 Hue Adjustment page 4 76 Color Balance page 4 77 Sharpness page 3 53 Background Density Adj page 3 54 Prevent Bleed through page 3 55
106. settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour Default Gateway This indicates the device such as a computer or router that serves as the entrance exit gateway for accessing computers outside the network that you are on When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP that automatically resolves IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses on a TCP IP network DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned DHCP IPv6 DHCP IPv6 is the next generation of the Internet s Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6 It extends the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the 11 23 Appendix gt Glossary network DHCP IPv6 permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an IPv6 node Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically the IPv6 node management workload is reduced in systems where the administ
107. settings to use the fax 6 Redial End GB0841 00 3 26 Common Operations gt Quick Setup Wizard Start the wizard Follow the instructions on the screen to configure settings 10 10 1 Dialing RX Mode Set the dialing and reception mode el GB0846_00 NOTE If you experience difficulty configuring the settings refer to Help Screen on page 3 28 End Exits the wizard Settings configured so far are applied lt lt Previous Returns to the previous item Skip gt gt Advances to the next item without setting the current item Next gt Advances to the next screen lt Back Returns to the previous screen Complete Register the settings and exit the wizard 3 27 Common Operations gt Help Screen Help Screen If you have difficulty operating the machine you can check how to operate it using the touch panel When the help is displayed on the touch panel you can press it to display the Help screen Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 IL 2 A4 LU A4 LU Plain Plain GB0004 00 How to read the screen Ready to copy Full Color uH 10 10 Help titles Paper Selection Select the cassette or multi purpose tray with the desired paper size Auto Automatically selects the appropriate i paper size Displays information about Cassette 1 Sees ue paper in cassette 1 Scrolls up and down when i i Cassette 2
108. sided Collate E Off Shortcut 1 Shortcut 2 Favorites tl tl GB0001 04 Functions 3 25 Common Operations gt Quick Setup Wizard Quick Setup Wizard Make the following basic settings as instructed by the Wizard Energy Saver Setup Configures sleep mode and low power mode 1 Sleep Mode Sleep Mode Auto Sleep Sleep Mode Sleep Timer Sleep Mode Sleep Level 2 Low Power Mode Low Power Mode Low Power Timer FAX Setup Configures basic fax settings 1 Dialing RX Mode Dialing RX Mode Dialing Mode Dialing RX Mode Reception Mode Dialing RX Mode Auto DRD 2 Local FAX Info Local FAX Info Local FAX Number Local FAX Info Local FAX ID Local FAX Info Print Position 3 Sound Volume Sound Volume Confirmation Speaker Volume Monitor Volume 4 Rings Rings Confirmation Answering Machine FAX TEL Switch 5 Output Output Paper Output Output Reduced RX Size 6 Redial Redial Retry Times This function is displayed when the optional fax is installed 1 Display the screen 10 10 System Menu Counter E Counter Nh GB0054 00 2 Select a function System Menu Counter 10 10 FAX Setup Energy Saver Setup GB0840 00 3 Configure the function 10 10 1 Dialing RX Mode 2 Local FAX Info Sta rt ng Setu D 3 Sound Volume 4 Rings This wizard will help you set 5 Output the basic
109. to search for an account name and sorts results Displays details for individual account names E mail Address System Menu Counter 10 10 Input 11 Limit 128 Access Level Adminis ator My Panel Local Authorization GB0444 01 GB0057_ 30 My Panel 10 10 Access Level c System Menu Counter 10 10 Language Default Screen Shortcut Shared Shortcut Local Authorization GB0441 01 GB0749 00 For details on My Panel refer to My Panel on page 9 42 X 9 44 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Local Authorization System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Printer E mail Address Access Level administrator My Panel Printer Full Color Copy Copy Full Color Local Authorization Cancel Cancel GB0444 01 Use v or to scroll up and down Local Authorization is displayed when selecting On for Local User Authorization Refer to Local User Authorization on page 9 41 3 Register the user System Menu Counter 10 10 User Name User A Login User Name User A Login Password FORK Account Name Others Cancel GB0441_00 To delete GB0440 01 Select the user you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon NOTE Also you can delete the user by selecting the user press Menu and then Delete 9 45 GB0839 00 setup Registratio
110. when using the machine possesses an IP address or host name that you have specified during installation of WIA Driver 1 Display the screen 1 Click the Windows Start button and enter Scanner in Program and File Search Click View scanners and cameras in the search list 2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers and press the Properties If you do not see your device in the list make sure it is connected to the computer and turned on then choose Refresh Refresh AddDevice Scan Profiles Do I need to use this to install my scanner or camera 2 Configure WIA Driver Enter the machine name When using SSL select the as 3 checkbox beside SSL When user login administration is enabled select the checkbox beside Authentication and enter Login User Name up to 64 characters and Password up to 64 characters When job accounting is enabled select the checkbox beside Account ID and enter the account ID as many as eight digits Preparation before Use gt Energy Saver function Energy Saver function Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode Energy Saver Power D Vo Low Power Mode To activate Low Power Mode press the Energy Saver key Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save power except the Energy Saver Power and Main Power indicators This status is referred to as Low Power Mode If print data is received durin
111. whose settings you wish to edit System Menu Counte Menu Counter 10 10 f Searches by user name Admin _ a z DeviceAdmin 2500 sS User A User A EN EEEESMVMI Jj 2 Edit the user For more information about individual settings refer to Adding a User on page 9 37 N User Name System Menu Counter 10 10 2 Input B B ar EUR Limit 32 ser Name ser Del Login User Name P Login Password xokolekokekekelelok Account Name Others Cancel EE CIS GB0441 00 GB0057 54 Login User Name 10 10 Input 2 Limit64 User Name User af Login User Name User A 1 2 Login Password xokolekokekekelelok Account Name Others GB0441 00 GB0057 28 9 43 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Login Password 10 10 User Name User A Login User Name User a Login Password xokolekokelekelolok Account Name Others Cancel Save t el Cancel Next gt ai oO Enter the same login password twice for confirmation purposes Input 3 Limit 64 GB0441_00 Account Name Searches by account name System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Q E M 9 e A A User Name User A Login User Name User A Login Password xokolekokelekelolok Account Name Others Cancel ave Cancel GB0441_00 GB0603 00 Allows you
112. with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach If necessary contact a physician e f you do happen to get toner in your eyes flush them thoroughly with water If there is any remaining tenderness contact a physician e ftoner does happen to get on your skin wash with soap and water Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box Other precautions Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations otore the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose MP Tray return it to its original package and reseal it 1 3 Preface gt Notice Laser Safety Europe Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body For this reason laser radiation emitted inside this machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover In the normal operation of the product by user no radiation can leak from the machine This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC EN 60825 1 2007 Caution Performance of p
113. 0 Common Operations gt Checking the Counter Checking the Counter Check the number of pages printed and scanned 1 Display the screen 10 10 E Quick Setup Wizard lt gt System Menu Counter Tu gt j 28 Report 2 pem 0 Use v or to scroll up and down Vv 1 GB0054 00 2 Check the counter 10 10 Printed Pages Scanned Pages GB0584 00 Select the job you wish to check Printed Pages Use v or L to serol up and down 10 10 Copy Total 2 Printer B amp W iU GB0585 00 Scroll the screen to check the number of pages Pressing Count by Paper Size and then Black amp White allows you to check the number of pages by paper size Scanned Pages 10 10 GB0589 00 Common Operations gt Login Logout Login Logout If user login administration is enabled it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the machine Refer to Adding a User on page 9 37 for the default login user name and password EN NOTE You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password In this event login with administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password Login Normal login 4 Enter the login user name 10 10 Input4 1 Limit 64 Keyboard Login Password Keyboard JaA Menu Login l i If this screen is displayed during opera
114. 0 Dest 0 Recall Check ea Continuous Scan 55 b a 4 z Ne zj File Name Entry One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book I n 1 2 Ne E mail Folder FAX Vv vy Favorites GB0055 00 GB0081 04 Use v or AN to scroll up and down 2 Enter the subject 3 4 Ready to send 10 10 i Input f t GB0088 00 GB0057 19 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N Enter the body Ready to send 10 10 Inputs Lirnit 500 Subject Meeting 1 i Body GB0088_01 GB0057_20 Cancel OK G Press OK 6 40 sending gt Sending Functions FTP Encrypted TX Encrypt images when using FTP Encryption secures the document transmission NOTE To use FTP encryption set SSL to On in the Secure Protocol settings For details refer to Secure Protocol on page 9 22 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 Dest 0 aes ce Recall Check FTP Encrypted TX o TA zt TAA LUCIldycu IIdIISITISSIUIT O One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book ff M 77 E mail Folder FAX v FAX Polling RX off GB0055_00 GB0081_05 Close Add Edi Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2
115. 0 Send Log History Auto Sending Off Destination E mail 1 1 Job Log Subject Refer to Setting the Destination on page 8 8 Automatic Log History Transmission on page 8 9 N Manual Log History Transmission on page 8 9 and Setting E mail Subject on page 8 10 GB0578 00 Status Job Cancel gt Sending the Log History Setting the Destination Set the destination to which log histories are sent 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8 7 display the screen 2 System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter A Send Log History 2 Auto Sending i 1 1 Destination E mail JUV LUY JUVJELL GB0581 00 GB0578 00 2 Select the destination Select from the Address Book Searches by destination name System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Q Address Book 2 Ext Address Book 1 gt 1 1 i a B aaa aaa abc com BBB bbb abc com Address Entry gt EZ ccc ccc abc com DDD ddd abc com Cancel GB0583_00 GB0398 01 Enter a new e mail address 10 10 a abc amp defcom Input 11 2 Limit 128 Address Book z Ext Address Book 1 i gt 1 1 Address Entry gt el Up to 128 characters can be entered GB0583_00 GB0057_22 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters 3 Accept the
116. 0 Power Cable 2 11 USB Cable 2 11 Connection Method 2 8 Continuous Scan 3 39 Conventions in This Guide 1 13 Copying 4 1 Copying Settings Auto Priority 9 15 Auto Paper Selection 9 15 Reserve Next Priority 9 15 D Date Timer 2 22 9 23 Auto Error Clear 9 24 Auto Panel Reset 9 23 Auto Sleep 9 23 Date Time 9 23 Date Format 9 23 Error Clear Timer 9 24 Interrupt Clear Timer 9 24 Low Power Timer 9 24 Panel Reset Timer 9 24 Sleep Level 9 24 Sleep Timer 9 24 Time Zone 9 23 Default Auto Image Rotation 9 12 Background Density Adj 9 12 Collate Offset 9 12 Color Selection Copy 9 12 Color Selection Send Store 9 12 Continuous Scan 9 12 EcoPrint 9 12 E mail Subject Body 9 13 File Format 9 12 File Name Entry 9 13 File Separation 9 12 FTP Encrypted TX 9 13 Image Quality 9 13 JPEG TIFF Print 9 13 Margin 9 12 Original Image 9 12 Original Orientation 9 12 PDF A Setting 9 13 Prevent Bleed through 9 12 Scan Resolution 9 12 XPS Fit to Page 9 13 Zoom 9 12 Default Gateway 11 23 Setup 9 18 Default Screen 9 9 Density 3 50 Index 1 Destination 6 15 Checking and Editing 6 22 Choosing by One Touch Key 6 17 Choosing from the Address Book 6 15 Dest Check before Send 9 15 Entering a New E mail Address 6 18 Entry Check for New Dest 9 15 Multi Sending 6 23 Specifying a New PC Folder 6 19 Device Status 8 11 FAX 8 12 Printer 8 12 Removable Memory 8 12 ocanner 8 11 DHCP 11 23 oetup 9 18 DHCP IPv6 11 23 oetup 9 19 Do
117. 0 10 Ready to send 10 10 2 A4 uie 1 3 Others Cancel GB0071 00 Use v or to scroll up and down Select the desired size 6 38 GB0072 00 sending gt Sending Functions File Separation Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page and send the files e NOTE Three digit serial number such as abc_001 pdf abc_002 pdf is attached to the end of the file name 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen 300x300dpi Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 Qj De 0g Check 2 sided Book Original Recall e rsded p A pom zy Sending Size EX Same as Oriainal Size One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book v fe File Separation Y ee ee Su n Off Ne Scan Resolution all E mail Folder FAX Vv dpi 2 GB0055_00 Add Edi Shortcut Use v or to scroll up and down 2 Select the function 10 10 Off rI W A e GB0084 00 6 39 GB0081 01 sending gt Sending Functions E mail Subject Body Add subject and body when sending a document NOTE The subject can include up to 60 characters and the body can include up to 500 characters 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 1
118. 01 increments Metric models X 148 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Y 98 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments Media Type Plain 105 g m or less Transparency Rough Vellum 64 g m or less Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick 106 g m and more Coated High Quality Custom 1 8 3 41 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Paper Output o USB Set paper output to document finisher or job separator tray Inner Tray Places pages face down in the inner tray Finisher Tray Places pages face down in the optional document finisher tray Job Separator Tray Places pages face down in the job separator tray fthe optional document finisher has been installed Inner Tray will change to Finisher Tray NOTE To change default destination refer to Paper Output on page 9 13 for details 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Paper Output 10 10 10 10 copies 1 iN ed be _ _ SS 0s y Original Size M xt Auto Paper OR Zoom 7 Ml Density E Selection Original Orientation Auto 100 Normal 0 Top Edge on Top ee es NNNM gt Mixed Size Originals Duplex Combine gg Collate Off gt Offset iw 4 a Ea e Paper Output 1 sided gt 1 sided Off Collate Inner tray G
119. 0428_01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Narrow Down Advanced search by type of registered destination E mail Folder SMB FTP or FAX Search Name and Search No Searches by destination name or address number Sort Name and Sort No Sorts the list by destination name or address number NOTE To cancel a selection press the corresponding checkbox to clear the check mark 7 Accept the members Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 Address Book Contact E y amt ta 001 if Sales department 1 0123456 iii Sales department 1 0123456 cm E 001 Sales department 1 abc u F Support department 0234567 am 1 2 1 1 ho Z Support department 0234567 002 department B EE e iv v GB0428 01 GB0114 04 Cancel rrr 8 Register the group Mam Ready to send 10 10 Name Support department Address Number Auto Member Member 2 Cancel GB0420_03 Sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries Edit and delete the destinations contacts you added to the Address Book 1 Display the screen Send GB0055 00 gt E mail Functions 10 10 oo i Sales department 1 0123456 __ 001 Sales department 1 abc 1 1 A M m 002 ce Support department 0234567 Jo0o2 c Support department 3 A pem EN d GB0426 01
120. 0775 00 Common Operations gt Favorites G Register the favorite Select the item that you want to change os MEN EIU IV Name Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi Sending Number Auto Cancel GB0766 00 Common Operations gt Favorites Editing and Deleting Favorites This section describes how to edit name and permission of the registered favorites and how to delete favorites 1 Display the screen 10 10 Favorites SS iE 7 EJ oF E W ID Card Copy Paper Saving Copy Scan to PC Addre ess Entry ue C M1 Scan to PC Addre Scan to E mail A Scan to E mail A ss Book ddress Entry ddress Book L MEN 2 Edit or delete a favorite GB0056 00 To edit a favorite 1 Select the favorite you wish to edit a 10 10 10 10 01 B Sending Job E mail 15 ID Card Copy 16 G Paper Saving Copy 17 ji Scan to PC Addreess Entry GBO0779 00 GBO0780 00 Input B Limit 32 GB0781 00 GB0057 82 Number mcer ab 10 10 Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi Sending Number 01 00 20 Owner Admin 1 GB0781 00 GB0760 00 3 18 Common Operations gt Favorites Permission ES 10 10 B 10 10 Destination Address Book Function Type Wizard A ad Configures permission settings for favorites to determine how they are shared with other users GB0781 02 GB0305 00 3
121. 2 Display the screen Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 60 display the screen 9 71 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 3 Print reports 10 10 Iotal Job Accounting Each Job Accounting GB0461 02 9 72 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Job Accounting Default Setting Sets default settings related to job accounting Display the screen 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 60 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Accounting List Default Setting gt Apply Limit Subsequently Individual 1 1 Count by Paper Size gt GB0461 01 GB0481 00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Setting Items Description Apply Limit This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction Value Immediately Job stops when the counter reaches its limit Subsequently Printing scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be rejected Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message Copier Printer Count You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown either the total of both or each of copying and printing individually The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 67 Counting the Number of aN Pages Printed on page 9 69 and
122. 3 4 Monarch ISO B5 Youkei 2 Youkei 4 Other sizes Portrait 3 7 8 to 11 5 8 or 98 to 297 mm Landscape 5 7 8 to 17 or 148 to 432 mm 11 10 Appendix gt Paper Basic Paper Specifications This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular dry copiers and page printers such as laser printers It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix Be careful when choosing paper Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled Supported Paper Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output Basic Paper Specifications The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine Refer to the subsequent sections for further details Criteria Specifications Weight Cassettes 60 to 256 g m Multi purpose tray 60 to 256 g m Thickness 0 086 to 0 230 mm Dimensional accuracy 0 7 mm Squareness of corners 90 0 2 Moisture content 4 to 6 Grain direction Long grain paper supply direction Pulp content 80 or more NOTE Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications shown below such as moisture or pulp content For this reason we recommend purcha
123. 612 8501 Japan Phone 81 75 604 3500 Fax 81 75 604 3501 www kyocera co jp X KYOCERA t KYOCERA 2KOKMENOO2
124. 7 EN a Bicycle Cancel User User A Password Login Off 1 Icon Male 1 Cancel GB0739 00 GB0828 01 Use v or to scroll up and down 3 Register the user 10 10 Password Login Off Cancel GB0739 00 To delete 10 i 2 em 02 User C Is g 03 User D 04User E 05 None 06 None 07 None 08 None GB0712_01 Select the user you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon NOTE You can also delete a user by selecting the name pressing Menu and then pressing Delete 9 51 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Group Authorization Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server NOTE To use the group authorization settings Network Authentication must be selected for the authentication method and NTLM or Kerberos must be selected as the server type in Enabling Disabling User Login Administration on page 9 35 Select On for LDAP in Protocol Detail on page 9 20 Group Authorization Settings Use the group authorization 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 34 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Network Authentication Local User List Simple login settings gt Group Authorization Off Group List 2
125. B0002 00 Add Edit Shortcut Use v or AN to scroll up and down GB0001 01 2 Select the output destination 10 10 Job Separator Tray e GB0031_00 3 42 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Collate Offset e Offset the output by page or set USB Collate Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of copies as required according to page number Offset Without Document Finisher Option When you use offsetting printed copies are produced after rotating each set or page by 90 NOTE To offset without a document finisher load the same size paper into a second paper source with a different orientation The paper sizes supported in Offset are A4 B5 Letter and 16K With Document Finisher Option When you use offsetting printed copies are segregated after each set of copies or after each page 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 3 43 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 2 2 Press Collate Offset Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Copies 1 Er E _ Paper m Zoom all Density enmt z a N Selection Auto 100 Normal 0 ur ERE um uuu Duplex Combine aya Collate j wm a 1 sided 1 sided Off M M GBO0001 01 Select the function Ready to copy Full Color
126. B0191_00 e The information such as sending receiving and dialing is displayed Press Line Off to cancel a fax in sending receiving For details refer to the FAX Operation Guide Removable Memory 10 10 Status Loaded Capacity 1 9GB Used Area 684 1MB Free Space 1 2GB Menu Remove Memo The usage and capacity of the external media connected to this machine are displayed GB0194 00 Press Menu and then Format to format external media Press Remove Memory to safely remove the external media This operation is the same as that for Removing USB Memory on page 7 8 8 12 Status Job Cancel gt Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper Check the remaining amount of toner paper and staples on the touch panel 1 Display the screen 10 10 Status i Job Ca ncel lere Running AN l 2 Waiting OK Toner Status Use v or AN to scroll up and down Pre Status No Paper ee GEN Print Jobs D 9 10 10 Jrenovabie Memory Attached AN USB Keyboard 2 Invalid 4 4 Staple OK Print Jobs a 9 Select the consumable you wish to check 2 Check the status Toner Status 10 10 Status Job Cancel 10 10 Waste Toner 0 q Black C 100 End GB0192 00 GB0192 01 You can check the rem
127. BranchCache Content Retrieval Uses HTTP Rule that controls connections for a Windows experience Custom Custom rule 6 12 Sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 6 KE MP New Inbound Rule Wizard Protocol and Ports Specify the protocols and ports to which this rule applies Steps amp Rule Type Does this rule apply to TCP or UDP M Action NETT Profile Does this rule apply to all local ports or specific local ports Specific local ports 139 Example 80 443 5000 5010 Leam more about protocol and ports 3 Select Specific local ports and enter 139 7 FK MP New Inbound Rule Wizard Action Specify the action to be taken when a connection matches the conditions specified in the rule Steps amp Rule Type What action should be taken when a connection matches the specified conditions Protocol and Ports Allow the connection Action This includes connections that are protected with IPsec as well as those are not Profile N W Allow tne connection If I Is secure woven This includes only connections that have been authenticated by using IPsec Connections will be secured using the settings in IPsec properties and rules in the Connection Security Rule node Block the connection Leam more about actions E MP New Inbound Rule Wizard Profile Specify the profiles for which this r
128. Coated High Quality Custom 1 to 8 The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box 9 74 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Unknown Login User Name Job This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login user names or User ID i e unsent IDs If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown 4 Display the screen Use V or to scroll up and down T lt gt System Menu Counter Printer 2 ami 4 5 b iia System Menu Counter Date Timer 1 User Login Settings Job Accounting Settings Unknown ID Job Reject GB0054 03 GB0434 00 2 Select the function System Menu Counter 10 10 Permit GB0491 00 9 75 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 9 76 10 Troubleshooting This chapter explains the following topics je s desicic diie e u aM m c 10 2 Waste Toner Box Replacement seessssssesssssseeeseee sese eene nne nnne nne n aa ise isses sse sese saei sese se sess asi asa annis 10 4 PS SO DIACING eje RETO oo 0o mtt 10 5 eI PY 10 6 MASS ilc iic DT TU En 10 6 DOCUMENTAR OCOS o eee oe ee eee mo 10 6 SOLVING MANUNC TONS rc
129. Color Selection lt 2 Full Color One Touch ien Address Book Ext Address Book ie gt z Sanae E qum p a omm Text Photo EX Sharpness E mail Folder FAX Vv th Favorites Close Add Edi Shortcut GB0055 00 GB0081 02 Use VV or to scroll up and down 2 Adjust density Ready to copy Full Color Normal GB0008 00 d Press 3 to 3 Lighter Darker to adjust density 3 50 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution Scan to USB The selectable resolution is 200x 100dpi 200x200dpi Fine 200x400dpi Super 300x300dpi 400x400dpi Ultra or 600x600dpi NOTE The larger the number the better the image resolution However better resolution also means larger file sizes and longer send times 1 2 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Send Ready to send 10 10 Dest 0 Recall Check J M One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book Ne Folder FAX Vv 1 2 Scan to USB 10 10 Tre L 2 sided LLS Format _ Book PDF 1 sided Density File Name padori ab Beny Normal 0 doc l p Functions Cancel GB0096 00 Select the resolution Ready to send La 600x600dpi 400x400dpi Ultr
130. Duplex Combine gi Collate Off _ 4 NH Eee see Hue Adjustment 1 sided gt 1 sided Off Collate 1m 0 GB0001_01 GB0002_01 wv Favorites Close Add Edi Shortcut Use v or to scroll up and down 2 Select the color mode 10 10 Auto Color Gray Auto Color B amp W Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to send s Auto Color Full Color Black amp White Grayscale Black amp White OMEN C EE GB0022 00 GB0022 01 MEN EJ 3 59 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Job Finish Notice send e mail notice when a job is complete Scan to Print from User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish NOTE PC should be configured in advance so that E mail can be used Email can be sent to a single destination 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Job Finish Notice Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 c Copies 1 k o m p Mr Job Finish Notice Paper B Zoom all Density Off LS Selection REA ab File Name Entry Auto 100 Normal 0 um ee ee Uc p pall Priority Override Duplex Combine gg Collate LJ 4 DS _ Offset 1 sided gt 1 sided Off Collate
131. EO TO OO DUE 3 35 ZSIGCG BOOK ONGINAL TC ions niei naaar a Sn eE ESEA a a a E ESE EEE TS 3 37 CONNUS SCAM E 3 39 m leicuslc EE T E E E EE O E E E A E A A A A A E E 3 41 mmo E E E E E E E E E EE 3 42 Eo ED SOE S 3 43 EIKE i p 3 45 vizio con X 3 48 Bla C 3 50 SCN FSS io T M 3 51 mna IMAGE esn adenine 3 52 S JR IZ 18818 ec RN TR TEN 3 53 BAC KO OUI TI GM SIGS Wc 3 54 Prevent Bleed NrouUgN MM T adai ae 3 55 LOO e a A 3 56 E LENNE RR RO A O E E E AE E A A A A E E EEE 3 57 eleme m T TAE A E E E 3 59 OTN FN A NOGO t 3 60 CAIN GMS E Y No EEEE EEE EEE E A 3 62 FEOV OVO ap E EEE EEEE EEE EE E TE A E E E X 3 63 3 1 Common Operations gt Loading Paper Loading Paper Paper can be loaded standardly in the cassette and the multi purpose tray A paper feeder is also available as an option refer to Optional Equipment on page 11 2 Before Loading Paper
132. ET 3 25 Quick Setup Wizard NN nen on T 3 26 EID TOE me 3 28 S e nomeo SM 3 29 Biz aemu uesix eere tmtmT 3 30 Common Functionally m 3 31 CPN IZ T Lm 3 32 SulelsiEeu urue F 3 34 Miked SIZE 8 19 piz METER EET EO TO TERT 3 35 2 sided Book Original M RE 3 37 COMMIS SCAN sess steacce sa ccne encased seannsasceenne TT TS 3 39 Paper SCICCU OI m 3 41 Bz 01 gt DUDUT ieee nena ne ene EE a eee nine eee eer nee eee rete ieee ee ee 3 42 Solili9gl qa E E 3 43 EISE Ets 3 45 vjc fem M E Oe O H 3 48 Bri 3 50 COMMIS SOUTO seana RR RT EEE EEE E E E EE N E E 3 51 ORINA E sess E T E N E 3 52 MEEA e e E E DRE 3 53 Background Densiby AJUST scosese rianaire a eM URN ME oa inani 3 54 Prevent Bleed through c ccccecceeccececeeeeeceeeceeseeeceeeceecaeecseeaeesaueseeseueseusseeseesees 3 55 4co g H 3 56 z ageng me c 3 57 Dae CIC Ul OMI T 3 59 JOD IIIS ONGC wis MTM MMTT 3 60 Pie NAME ENUY axcsnatnsvconsntacvanss 3 62 Pronty
133. FTP available e he server is not operating properly Failed to send the e mail Check the network The network cable is connected he hub is not operating properly e he server is not operating properly 2201 Failed to send the e mail Check the network 2202 Failed to send via FTP e The network cable is connected 2203 Failed to send via SMB he hub is not operating properly 2231 Failed to send via FTP e he server is not operating properly 2204 Failed to send the e mail Check the e mail size limit of the SMTP settings on the 2 24 COMMAND CENTER 3101 Failed to send the e mail Check the authentication methods of both the sender and the recipient Failed to send via FTP Check the network The network cable is connected e he hub is not operating properly e he server is not operating properly 3201 Failed to send the e mail Check the SMTP user authentication method of the recipient 0007 Turn the main power switch off and back on If this error occurs 2 12 4201 several times make a note of the displayed error code and 4701 contact your service representative 5101 5102 5103 5104 7101 7102 7103 720f 10 22 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Clearing Paper Jams If a paper jam occurs the touch panel will display Paper Jam and the machine will stop Refer to these procedures to remove the jammed paper How to read the screen S 10 10 Paper jam Clear the paper jammed i
134. IP IPv4 Setup 9 18 TCP IP IPv6 11 26 ThinPrint Protocol Detail 9 20 ThinPrintOverSSL Protocol Detail 9 20 Tone Curve Adjustment 9 26 Toner Container 2 3 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 8 13 Replacement 10 2 Touch Panel 2 7 TWAIN 11 26 setting TWAIN Driver 2 18 U Unknown Login User Name Job 9 75 USB 11 26 USB Cable Connecting 2 11 USB Interface 2 4 2 9 Index 4 USB Keyboard Type 9 15 USB Memory Printing Documents 7 2 Removing 8 Saving Documents 7 5 USB Memory Slot 2 2 User Login Administration 9 33 Adding a User 9 37 Editing and Deleting 9 43 Enabling Disabling 9 35 Group Authorization 9 52 Local User Authorization 9 41 My Panel 9 42 Obtain Network User Property 9 56 Simple Login 9 46 User Property 9 7 W Waste Toner Box 2 3 Replacement 10 4 WIA 11 26 setting WIA Driver 2 19 WSD Print Setup 9 21 WSD Scan Setup 9 21 X XPS Fit to Page 7 13 Z Zoom Copy 4 5 Send Store 3 56 Index 5 Index 6 QUALITY CERTIFICATE This machine has passed all quality controls and final inspection PASSIONATE PEOPLE FROM ALL OVER THE WORLD KYOCERA MITA EUROPE B V EUROPEAN HEADQUARTERS Bloemlaan 4 2132 NP Hoofddorp The Netherlands Phone 31 20 654 0000 Fax 31 20 653 1256 www kyoceramita europe com KYOCERA MITA Europe B V Amsterdam NL Zweigniederlassung Zurich Hohlstrasse 614 CH 8048 Zurich Phone 41 1 908 49 49 Fax 41 1 908 49 50 www kyoceramita ch
135. If you select Off for Auto Panel Reset the time display does not appear Sleep Timer Interrupt Clear Timer Error Clear Timer Set amount of time before entering Sleep Value 1 to 240 minutes 1 minute increments NOTE If you select Off for Auto Sleep the time display does not appear Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set to Interrupt Copy mode and then left unused Value 5 to 495 seconds every five seconds If you select On for Auto Error Clear set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors Value 5 to 495 seconds every five seconds NOTE If you select Off for Auto Error Clear the time display does not appear 9 24 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Adjustment Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance Item Description Density Adjustment Adjust density Copy Adjust copy density Adjustment can be made in 7 levels Value 3 Lighter 2 1 O Normal 1 2 3 Darker Send Box Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box Adjustment can be made in 7 levels Value 3 Lighter 2 1 O Normal 1 2 3 Darker Background Density Adj Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment Copy Auto Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment during copying Adjustment can be made in 7 leve
136. Input 11 Limit 128 e zixicivibinim GB0057 05 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters Uses the e mail address of the logged in user Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 WF Address Book E Ext Address Book gt SE Address Entry 1 1 Cancel Back gt el Next gt GB0064_00 This setting is displayed when using user login administration Accept the destinations Press OK 3 61 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions File Name Entry Add a file name Additional information such as Job No and Date and Time can also be set You can check a job history or job status using the job name date and time or job number specified here 1 3 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen Copy Send Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color BENE Cors 1 E m SSS SSS Job Finish Notice Paper E Zoom all Density a ME Selection pM po rz mi File Name Entry Auto 100 Normal 0 TER SS A Poet 7 Duplex Combine av Collate 2 wc c Offset 1 sided 1 sided Off Collate GB0001 01 Use V or A to scroll up and down Scan to USB 10 10 m st 2 sided Scan Book Resolution _ 1 sided J be File Name abf Entr
137. Job Log page 8 6 Store Job Log page 8 6 Scanner page 8 11 Printer page 8 72 FAX page 8 12 Removable Memory page 8 72 Toner Status page 8 73 Paper Status page 8 73 Staple page 8 74 xiii lt gt System Menu Counter v Quick Setup Wizard page 3 26 FAX Setup page 3 26 Energy Saver Setup page 3 26 Language page 9 5 Report page 9 5 Report Print page 9 5 Status Page page 9 5 Font List page 9 5 Network Status page 9 5 Service Status page 9 6 Accounting Report page 9 6 Sub Address Box List refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX List Index refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX List No refer to Fax Operation Guide Outgoing FAX Report refer to Fax Operation Guide Incoming FAX Report refer to Fax Operation Guide Admin Report Settings refer to Fax Operation Guide Result Report Setting page 9 6 Send Result Report page 9 6 RX Result Report refer to Fax Operation Guide Job Finish Notice Setting page 9 6 Send Log History page 8 7 Manual Log History Transmission page 8 9 Auto Sending page 8 9 Destination page 8 8 Job Log Subject page 8 10 Counter Printed Pages page 3 11 Scanned Pages page 3 11 User Property page 9 7 User Name page 9 7 Login User Name page 9 7 Login Password
138. KYOCERA MITA SALES COMPANIES IN EMEA KYOCERA MITA INTERNATIONAL SALES Europe Middle East amp North Africa Bloemlaan 4 2132 NP Hoofddorp The Netherlands Phone 31 20 654 0000 Fax 31 20 653 1256 www kyoceramita europe com AUSTRIA KYOCERA MITA AUSTRIA GmbH Eduard Kittenberger Gasse 95 A 1230 Wien Phone 43 1 86 338 0 Fax 43 1 86 338 400 www kyoceramita at BELGIUM S A KYOCERA MITA Belgium N V Sint Martinusweg 199 201 BE 1930 Zaventem Phone 32 2 720 9270 Fax 32 2 720 8748 www kyoceramita be DENMARK KYOCERA MITA Denmark A S Ejby Industrivej 60 DK 2600 Glostrup Phone 45 70 22 3880 Fax 45 45 76 3850 www kyoceramita dk FINLAND KYOCERA MITA Finland OY Kirvesmiehenkatu 4 FI 00880 Helsinki Phone 358 9 4780 5200 Fax 358 9 4780 5390 www kyoceramita fi FRANCE KYOCERA MITA France S A Espace Technologique de St Aubin Route de l Orme FR 91195 Gif sur Yvette CEDEX Phone 33 1 6985 2600 Fax 33 1 6985 3409 www kyoceramita fr GERMANY KYOCERA MITA Deutschland GmbH Otto Hahn Str 12 D 40670 Meerbusch Germany Phone 49 2159 918 0 Fax 49 2159 918 100 www kyoceramita de ITALY KYOCERA MITA Italia S P A Via Verdi 89 91 I 20063 Cernusco sul Naviglio MI Phone 39 02 921 791 Fax 39 02 921 796 00 www kyoceramita it THE NETHERLANDS KYOCERA MITA Nederland B V Beechavenue 25 1119 RA Schiphol Rijk Phone 31 20 587 7200 Fax 31 20 587 7260 www kyoceramita
139. L Envelope C5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Monarch Youkei 4 Youkei 2 5 sheets Heavy paper 106 to 256 g m 10 sheets when using heavy paper with a weight of 164 g m or greater only A4 Letter or smaller sheets can be loaded NOTE When you load custom size paper enter the paper size by referring to Paper Size on page 9 8 When you use special paper such as thick paper select the media type by referring to Media Type on page 9 8 4 Adjust the multi purpose tray size AAAS When loading paper sizes from A3 to B4 and Ledger to Legal extend the support tray section of the multi purpose tray 3 5 Common Operations gt Loading Paper 2 Load paper Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops Q IMPORTANT Load the paper with the print side facing down Curled paper must be uncurled before use Straighten the top edge if it is curled When loading paper into the multi purpose tray check that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more first remove the left over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray Close the flap Cardstock Return post
140. O Mal TEQUINOII s 11 2 Overview of Optional Equipment ccccccsecccesccescecseecnecsneecueecueecaucceuecsueecauecsuecsueessuesaeeseueessaeeseeegas 11 2 Paper Feeder single cassette 5 2 5 1e e oorpore sta e o ens kH co gen E FUP PY Ubxvreded cUm sus Fuse edax e Udr doe RubP deb eek E MEUS dS 11 3 Paper Feeder double cassette cccccccccsccccesseeceeeeccceneecseuceccueeeceueeeeeueeessaesessueeesseusessugeesseneeesenseeseas 11 3 Bleeda s mi gewe c M MEA 11 3 EAA d NT L 11 3 EXPAN SION WIGIMONY E 11 3 Card Authentication KI 11 4 CFIC E MNEmMEt BOAO e eaae 11 5 BE aS ne E E E en N A eee S E A 11 5 OPUN FUNCION T mmm 11 5 Character Entry Method 11 7 mm M 11 10 Basic Paper opecilcallObS xsaseecentaxuiteniumieiturniauMirCacinaiesen aai nbn be ses addt ei texutett dantes sek eaaa EROS 11 11 Choosing the Appropriate Papel sisirin i aAa RU qun E ORI PER NR esta F Tu Tas eD I mU RP C des 11 11 SS CLAN ADOT seira an e esto nur itor Fur ts EE ebeecionderiqn EENE EE tUa redde 11 14 wiorselecu pq t 11 18 enr ediile qe
141. OMMAS cee sass E E Oo tomm 3 7 Placing Originals on the Platen uusassacue codexpa e Iebutun o iu soi audiente odia sat PE braun Rica str afr attracted 3 7 Loading Originals in the Document Processor cccccccseeeeceeeeceeeceeeeceeeeceeeeeseeeseeeeseeeeseeeseeessneeseeeess 3 8 Checking the Equipment s Serial Number esssssssssssssssesesenenen nennen nenne nenne nne nsns nn rna sena nns 3 10 CMCC Ie TINS COUMO mr 3 11 LOA LOGOUT MN ene reenter ee ee ee ee eee ee 3 12 gp er cc 3 14 FREGISIENING Favorits RR u 3 14 Edi ndg and Deleting Favoritos ssissnsasededpeude exasdDusbed scele dabo a IM utr e Quad Dx ud en Unda eiai 3 18 B nelle EET E wee R EE neues sone vernint 3 20 SMOC UNS css rep 3 22 mice itid gie ego LO UCET TRE TT 3 22 me uilgeezigoBBI i iistoe pego lio 3 24 RS NI DINER 3 25 Sie AESi ea Fco MN mom 3 26 misere i i MO u 3 28 egeo d 3 29 Using AUTOS TUCO Se T T eacelea endear atte wate 3 30 Doane ES rae E E E E A EE erede sans E A A T E EE E T 3 32 OVINA ONEMAN TRU ren E a nal E EE E E EE EE EEES EEE 3 34 WICC IE OONA eee
142. OPERATION GUIDE FS C8020MFP FS C8025MFP Ec sis t KYOCERA Introduction Thank you for your purchase of FS C8020MFP FS C8025MFP This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly perform routine maintenance and take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary so that you can always use the machine in good condition Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine We recommend the use of our own brand supplies We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine A label shown in the illustration assures that the supplies are our own brand j ifi NSULCING 4 ARG x mi PKI W KYOCE In this Operation Guide FS C8020MFP is referred to as 20 ppm model and FS C8025MFP is referred to as 25 ppm model respectively Included Guides The following guides are supplied with the machine Refer to them as necessary Quick Installation Guide Describes the procedures for installation of the machine frequently used operations routine maintenance and troubleshooting action Safety Guide Provides safety and cautionary information for the installation and use of the machine Be sure to read this guide before using the machine Safety Guide FS C8020MFP Describes the machine installation space cautionary space and other information Be FS C8025MFP sure to read this guide before using the machine DVD Product Library Operation G
143. OS version Install Printer Driver AOC wv Install Ps al 1E elcome to the Hie i ESSEN 18 GREE Installer KYOCERA Introduction Read Me You will be guided through the steps necessary to install this software Go Back Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software This completes the printer driver installation Next specify the print settings If an IP or AppleTalk connection is used the settings below are required If a USB connection is used the machine is automatically recognized and connected Preparation before Use gt Installing Software 4 Configure the printer 1 Display the window Print amp Fax e a Show All Q eo System Preferences Printers Personal T Adobe PDF 7 0 cr u M B ao o Q d OOOO OE OEO Appearance Desktop amp Dock Expos amp Language amp Security Spotlight M Open Print Queue A Screen Saver Spaces Text Canin pee Options amp Supplies Hardware Location Kind Adobe PDF J 3016 102 m OB A Z CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard Mouse Print amp Fax Sound Saver Internet amp Wireless 1 2 n e o a MobileMe Network Bluetooth Sharing System Status Paused vi Share this printer on the network Sharing Preferences Default printer Last Printer Used 4 CIN A Ns dy e ri i Default paper size A4 4 Accounts Date amp Time
144. Ovenide 3 63 E 4 1 Basie ODS AUO MEN REDE NR m 4 2 OD VIG FUNCIO S M 4 4 ZOOM 4 5 Bol 4 8 CODIE a E 4 12 ECO mig T saubeiansie 4 15 BAS FS ers o PRONTO E E A A A E 4 16 Colar BANOE MNT 4 17 SUON aeea Ere EE Ser E EEEE E E E ER 4 18 AWO IMAJO RON Mr m 4 19 ITU TIO Da e E E E E A EAE E AE A A E O E E A 4 20 5 1 zuilssemirentileoezue o P 5 2 Printing Data Saved on the Printer ccccccccescccecesesecseeceeeceeeceeseueessuesageceesseseesseeseesenes 5 6 TUS TUN e A E EA E AEA E E ETE E E A E E E E 5 6 POOL MOTON oyara E E oe nan a E 5 8 Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents eeeeeseeesseeese 5 11 SCN ees 6 1 sese E 6 2 Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC oo cece cccccececeeeceeeeceeeseeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeeaeeeaes 6 5 Checking What to Enter for Host Name cccceecceccceceeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeaeeeaeeees 6 5 Checking What to Enter for Login User Name eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeene 6 6 Crea
145. PEG file e XPS file e Encrypted PDF file PDF files you wish to print should have an extension pdf Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot A1 We do not guarantee that USB memory printing is error free if a USB hub is used 1 Plug the USB memory QOO Q Q 9 oO mo W a Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot A1 When the message Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files Are you sure is displayed press Yes Q IMPORTANT Use USB memory formatted by this machine If a USB memory formatted by any other device is used The removable memory is not formatted may appear Refer to Check of Device Status on page 8 11 N Document Box gt Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory 2 Display the screen Ce S 11 3 3 3P6 7 9 2 3PG GB0089 03 1 When the machine reads the USB memory Removable Memory screen may appear NOTE If the screen does not appear press the Document Box key and then Removable Memory 2 Select and open the folder in which the file you wish to print is stored The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels including the root folder To return to a higher level folder press Back 3 Select the file 10 10 J B 11 3 3aPG MV Bi 7 92J
146. PG Cancel GB0089 02 Displays details for individual files Select the file to be printed and press Print 4 Enter the quantity Eo U A k q _ Paper um Collate Duplex Selection Offset LO A4 D Collate 1 sided GB0097 00 NOTE Press the Clear key to change the copy quantity Cancel 1 3 Document Box gt Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory 5 Select the functions 6 eo to print from Box 10 10 Copes 1 M Collate Duplex N Selection Offset A4 D Collate 1 ded GB0097 00 Cancel Select the function to use for Document Box Press Functions to display other functions For details refer to Functions for Document Box on page 7 9 X Start printing Start Press the Start key to start printing Remove the USB memory For details refer to Removing USB Memory on page 7 8 N Document Box gt Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine You can store files in PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS format 1 Place the originals NNNNN For details refer to Loading Originals on page 3 7 N 2 Plug the USB memory Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot A1 When the message Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files Are you sure is displayed press Yes
147. Parental Software Speech Startup Disk Time Machine Universal Controls Update Access M id Click the lock to prevent further changes 2 Click the IP icon for an IP connection or the AppleTalk icon for an AppleTalk connection and then enter the IP address and printer name Add Printer Address 192 168 48 21 Valid and camniete address Queue m Leave blank for default queue Name 192 168 48 21 3 ss Hd Add 4 Print Using amem Bes 9 3 Select the options available for the machine and click Continue Installable Options 192 168 48 21 Make sure your printer s options are accurately shown here so you can take full advantage of them For information on your printer and its optional hardware check the documentation that came with it Paper Feeders Not Installed S 1 Optional Disk Notinstalled i 4 The selected machine is added eoo Print amp Fax gt J show Q 192 168 47 21 Open Print Queue Options amp Supplies Location 192 168 47 21 Idle Last Used Adobe PDF 7 0 o Paused Kind Po baini ia Status Idle C Share this printer on the network Sharing Preferences Default printer Last Printer Used E Default paper size A4 E a Click the lock to prevent further changes 2 17 Preparation before Use gt Installing Software Setting TWAIN Driver Register th
148. Printing an Accounting Report on page 9 71 for details Value Total Individual Default Counter Limit When you add a new account you can change the default restrictions on the number of pages used Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 67 X Value 1 to 9 999 999 in 1 sheet increments 9 73 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Count by Paper Size Description This counts the number of pages used for specific paper sizes for example count the number of pages printed using A4 paper You can specify five paper sizes 1 to 5 The number of pages used for the paper sizes specified here can be referenced under by Paper Size when counting page use This information can also be printed in accounting reports Q Refer to Counting the Number of Pages Printed on page 9 69 and Printing an Ww Accounting Report on page 9 71 You can also count page use by specifying paper size and media type for example count the number of pages printed in color using A4 paper If All Media Types is specified the number of pages printed using the specified paper size is counted regardless of media type Value Paper Size 1 to 5 Paper size A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 Folio Ledger Legal Letter Statement Media type All Media Types Plain Transparency Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick 106 g m and more
149. Resolution Print at resolution of the actual image Fit the image size to the print resolution Display the screen 1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7 2 display the screen Ready to print from Box 10 10 Ready to print from Box 10 10 Copies Paper Off J p N RE PDF Password llate Duplex anco LS Selection _ Offset l L 1 JPEG TIFF Print A4 D Collate 1 sided dpi Paper Size 2 2 XPS Fit to Page 5 9 Add Edi Shortcut GB0097 00 GB0099 01 Cancel Use V or AN to scroll up and down Select the function Ready to print from Box 10 10 m err Image Resolution Print Resolution GB0101 00 E 1 12 Document Box gt Functions for Document Box XPS Fit to Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS files 1 2 Display the screen 1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7 2 display the screen Ready to print from Box 10 10 Copies l Paper m Collate 73 Duplex Selection Offset LO J Collate 1 sided Select the function 10 10 e Cancel Ready to print from Box 10 10 uiuo PDF Password 1 JPEG TIFF Print dpi D A XPS Fit to Page Paper Size Off Add Edi Shortcut GB0099 01 GB0097 00 Use v or AN to s
150. Select the function 10 10 GB0091 00 m L e 6 41 Sending gt WSD Scan WSD Scan WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD compatible computer NOTE To use WSD Scan confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network connected and WSD Scan page 9 21 is set to On in the network settings For information on operating the computer refer to the computer s help or the operation guide of your software Installing Driver Software for Windows 7 1 Display the window From the Start menu select Network 2 Install the driver Right click the machine s icon and then click Install NOTE If the User Account Control window appears click Continue If the Found New Hardware window appears click Cancel During the installation double click the icon shown on the task bar to display the Driver Software Installation screen When Your devices are ready to use is displayed on the screen the installation is completed Using WSD 4 Press the Send key Send 2 Place the originals NNNNN NNI M For details refer to Loading Originals on page 3 7 6 42 Sending gt WSD Scan 3 Display the screen 10 10 10 10 Best 0 Dest 0 o Recall j check _ Recall Check N One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book WSD Scan e EE 1 2 2 2 pd Favorite
151. TP and fax numbers This is referred to as Multi Sending This is useful for sending to different types of destination e mail addresses folders etc in a single operation Requires the optional fax kit No of broadcast items E mail Up to 100 Folders SMP FTP Total of 5 SMB and FTP FAX Up to 100 Also depending on the settings you can send and print at the same time Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types Continue to enter E mail address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list Press the Start key to launch transmission to all destinations at one time NOTE If the destinations include a fax the images sent to all destinations will be black and white 6 23 sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book Registering Destinations in the Address Book Add a new destination to the Address Book There are two registering methods contacts and groups When adding a group enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book Adding a Contact A maximum of 200 contact addresses can be registered Each address can include the information such as destination name E mail address FTP server folder path computer folder path and FAX No optional NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges Contact address
152. Value Off On Prevent Bleed through Set the default value for preventing bleed through Value Off On Zoom Select the enlarged reduced default when paper size sending size changed after the originals set Value 100 Auto Margin Set the default margin Value Left Right 18 to 18 Top Bottom 18 to 18 Left Right 0 75 to 0 75 Top Bottom 0 75 to 0 75 Continuous Scan Set the continuous scan defaults Value Off On Auto Image Rotation Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting Value Off On Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu File Name Entry Description Set an automatically entered name default for jobs Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No can also be set Value File Name Up to 32 characters can be entered Additional Info None Date and Time Job No Job No amp Date and Time Date and Time amp Job No E mail Subject Body Set the subject and body automatically entered default subject and body when sending the scanned originals by E mail Value Subject Up to 60 characters can be entered Body Up to 500 characters can be entered FTP Encrypted TX Set the default value for document encryption during transmission Value Off On NOTE This setting is displayed when the secure protocol SSL setting is On JPEG TIFF Print Select the image size resolution when printing JPEG or TIFF file Value Paper Size Image Resoluti
153. a 300x300dpi 10 10 Fil Fi 200x400dpi Super 200x200dpi Fine 200x100dpi Normal QO C i GB0085 00 3 51 GB0055 00 Ready to send 10 10 2 sided Book Original e 1 sided ex Sending Size u Zag Same as Original Size File Separation 2 Scan Resolution all dpi 300x300dpi Vv Add Edit Shortcu a Use v or AN to scroll up and down GB0081 01 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Original Image copy sena egas USB Select original image type for best results Text Photo Best for originals which contain a mixture of text and photos Best for photographs Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines Graphic Map Best for graphics and maps Printer Output Best for documents printed on this machine originally Text for OCR For documents to be read by OCR This function is displayed while copying Chis function is displayed when the color mode is Auto Color B amp W or Black amp White when sending or storing 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Original Image Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Copies 1 Ej MM El Color Selection 2 _ Paper LN Zoom oll Density Full Color MZ Selection a S Original Image Auto 100 Normal 0 eH Text Photo S um
154. ad refer to Special Paper Action on page 9 11 Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 10 for selecting Custom 1 8 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Common Settings Configures overall machine operation Default Screen Item Description Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start up default screen Value Copy Send FAX Document Box Favorites Status Sound Description Buzzer Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations Volume Set the buzzer volume level Value O Mute 1 Minimum to 5 Maximum Key Confirmation Emit a sound when the operation panel and touch panel keys are pressed Value Off On Job Finish Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed Value Off On FAX Reception Only NOTE FAX Reception Only is displayed when the optional fax is installed Ready Emit a sound when the warm up is completed Value Off On Warning Emit a sound when errors occur Value Off On Key Confirmation USB Emit a sound when a key on the optional USB keyboard is pressed Keyboard Value Off On Original Settings Description Custom Original Size Set up frequently used custom original size The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select original size To register a custom paper size press On and enter the desired size The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select original size Value
155. aeeecaeesaeesauecaueesaeesauesaeessueesaeeses 11 5 USB Keyboard MT 11 5 OpUOnal FUNGUO RE Eu a eei 11 5 Character Entry Method nannanoannnnnannnannannnnnnnennnsnrnnrernnnneonrrnresnrsrernrnnrennrnrrnrrrnrenrrnnrnrrnnrnne 11 7 ENUY O COONS eer E EE E E EEE OEE E EEE E 11 7 Entering stie RED Um nee eee 11 9 FAI NC TCRHMPEEE DERI a occ etch dean ECHO 11 10 Basic Paper Specifications ccccccccseccceeccececeeeceeeceueceueesaeecueesseeseueeaeeeseeeseeeseeees 11 11 Choosing the Appropriate Paper eesseessesssenneennnennnnnennen nennen 11 11 SPECIAL PAPET NE E T DTE 11 14 SPEEA TONS ger E 11 18 COMINON TUNCUONS RR E EAR m 11 18 GODY TUNCUONS sinise EE eS ee ee ee OEE 11 19 munire qe 11 20 gt 6 2 11 METER 11 20 Document Processor sescrsa tindactocetes cecawue jedagoa dicey naancemntitmnelsudaaaencebecimdedetuadmmidivaaienetuaes 11 21 Paper Feeder single cassette option cccceccccceeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeaeeeesaeeeessaeees 11 21 Paper Feeder double cassette option ccccecceseeeecceeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeesaass 11 21 Document Finisher option eeeesssessseseeeeeeenenen nennen nnne nnne nnns 11 22 Environmental Specifications ssssssssssssseseseeeeen nennen nnn nnn nnns 11 22
156. aining amount of each color toner as one of 11 levels from 100 to 0 and check the status of waste toner box Paper Status 10 10 ls Bain Em s Plain ur Plain 4 Plain GB0193 00 The remaining amount of paper is shown by four levels as 100 7096 30 and 0 none however the paper in the multi purpose tray is shown by two levels as 100 and 0 If there is no paper in either cassette the paper status will be shown as No Paper 8 13 Status Job Cancel gt Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper Staple Status GB0195 00 You can check the status of staples 8 14 9 setup Registration and User Management This chapter explains the following topics vacuam c 9 2 Operauon srt uro re NENNT ei e nEn E ENEP EEEE EEEE EEEE E EEE a 9 2 System Menu SeblligS ictwsacnwesrindsanceddensinasnandaasanumadensaawed R2 Vui dtua vied pandaaunpsuaneewchstuaueastsuasecdeaetapaudansundadacoune 9 3 gie eM 9 5 WISOE PODON state 9 7 Cassette MP Tray Settings e E 9 8 SonneMe ioq O 9 9 COPY c 9 15 vp MH 9 15 alc gqe
157. all can help prevent hackers or malicious software from gaining access to your computer through Windows Firewall through the Internet or a network Change notification settings How does a firewall help protect my computer B Turn Windows Firewall on or What are network locations off B Rectore defauit Home or work private networks Connected 4f Advanced settings Networks at home or work where you know and trust the people and devices on the network IIUUUICSIIUUL Ty network Windows Firewall state On Incoming connections Block all connections to programs that are not on the list of allowed programs 3 Windows Firewall with Advanced Security File Action View Help e 3i HE 2 Qn Advance Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer E3 Inbound Rules Big Connection Security Rules d Windows Firewall with Advanced Security provides network security for Windows computers S Import Policy b K Monitoring 4m Export Policy Restore Default Policy Domain Profile Diagnose Repair 7 Windows Firewall is on View gt Inbound connections that do not match a rule are blocked d Refresh v Outbound connections that do not match a rule are allowed x tj Properties Private Profile is Active Help Windows Firewall is on Eror reana A File Action View Help zi Windows Firewall with Advance E3 Inbound Rules 3 Outbound Rules B Connection Security Rules
158. ames smith abcdnet Login Password Password to access the PC Up to 64 characters For send to folder FTP Data to be entered Max characters Host Name Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 64 characters Path Path to the receiving folder Up to 128 characters For example User ScanData Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory Login User Name FTP server login user name Up to 64 characters Login Password FTP server login password Up to 64 characters Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters 4 Confirm the information Check the information Change the information as needed by pressing the item in question Ready to send 10 10 Host Name Use V or AN to scroll up and down Login User Name Cancel GB0128 00 When specifying a computer or server port number as the destination press Port and enter the port number You can enter a number from 1 to 65 535 with a maximum of 5 digits Confirm the connection status 10 10 SSS 10 10 Connection Test Next Destination 2 Add to Address Book Host Name abc bc 1 2 lt gt lt Back 9 4 d Close GB0128 00 GB0020 00 Connected appears when connection to the destination is correctly established If Cannot connect appears review the entry To enter multiple destinations press Next Destination and enter the next destination You can specify a
159. are written by Tim Hudson tjh gcryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 1 10 Preface gt Legal and Safety Information The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1 9 Software shall mean the digitally encoded machine readable scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software You agree to accept a non exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights styles and versions of letters numerals characters and symbols Typefaces solely for your own customary business or personal pu
160. ation values for each chart 6 Press Start after all values have been entered Color registration begins 10 10 Cancel GB0643 01 7 Press OK after color registration is complete 9 32 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration User Login Administration User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine Enter correct login user name and password for user authentication to login Access are in three levels User Administrator and Machine Administrator The security levels can be modified only by the machine administrator First User Login Administration Follow these steps for the first user login administration For details about the configuration method refer to User Login Settings on page 9 34 1 Enable user login administration 10 10 User Login Local Authentication T User List MM login settings d il User Authorization GB0435 00 2 Add a user A n t3 DeviceAdmin 2500 GB0440 00 Menu 3 Log out Logout 4 The registered user logs in for operations 10 10 Login User Name Login Password Keyboard e GB0723_00 9 33 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration User Login Settings 1 Display the screen Use v or AN to scroll up and down M lt gt System Menu Counter Bre 2 E System Menu Counter 10 10
161. ber of simultaneous users to 20 Comments 2 Tejen ox cms j v In Windows XP select Share this folder and click the Permissions button E Permissions for scannerdata Share Permissions Group or user names fme j Select Users or Groups Select this object type Users Groups or Builtin security principals Object Types From this location m 7 2 ue UTERE ae vens lt 3 e Advanced OK l Cance L Foi Enter the user name in the text box Click the Location button and select the desired location To select the search target click a location to select it When you are a member of a domain your current domain will be set as the search target by default 6 8 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 4 Permissions for scannerdata Share Permissions Group or user names ga Evenmns PCO01 PCO01 james smith 1 Permissions for james smith Allow Deny eat i E Change 2 e m a as Leam about access control and permissions Select the entered user select the Change and Read permissions In Windows XP go to step 6 NOTE Everyone gives sharing permission to everyone on the network To strengthen security it is recommended that you select Everyone and remove the Read permission checkmark 5 Click the OK bu
162. card Hagaki Portrait form Landscape form Oufukuhagaki envelopes envelopes Open the flap Load envelope with the print side facing down Q IMPORTANT Use unfolded return postcard Oufukuhagaki How to load envelopes orientation and facing will differ depending on the type of envelope Be sure to load it in correctly otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face 3 6 Common Operations gt Loading Originals Loading Originals Placing Originals on the Platen You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals NOTE Before opening the document processor be sure that there are no originals left on the original table or on the original eject table Originals left on the original table or on the original eject table may fall off when the document processor is opened Shadows may be produced around the edges and in the middle of open faced originals Align it flush against the Original size indicator plates with the back left corner as the reference point JPH Le Put the scanning side facedown Open the document processor and place the original A CAUTION Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury Q IMPORTANT Do not push the document processor forcefully when you close it Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass When placing books or magazines on the machine do so with the document processor
163. cceeeceeeceeeceueecaeeceueceueesaeesseesenesueeseeesagees 2 9 CORMCCIING Cables JG 2 10 Connecting LAN Cable 2 10 Connecting USB CADIE xescc cpcscatntccantobenssnocesanaadedinantinvacinndieatheuanennhtesabaateebnedseameteactiee 2 11 Connecting the Power Cable cccccscccssccescceseecueceucecacecseeceusceeecueecseesauessensaaes 2 11 0 59 10 M Ot 2 12 xol M H 2 12 x29 e m 2 12 PTV CAIN FNC eere qu Tz IS P OO E Omm 2 14 Installing Printer Driver lseeesesseseseeeeeee nennen nnnm nnn nnns 2 14 Setting R27 NU cc 2 18 Seting WIA DIVEN e 2 19 migrasse RE E 2 20 Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode cccccccseeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeaeeeees 2 20 Sleep and AUTO SIGSD M 2 21 Machine Setup Wizard s naaa a ae A aa O TEERAA KEE AERAR 2 22 COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail 2 0 0 0 ccccccceseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseneeseeeeeeeseseeeesees 2 23 CGI MINN RR 2 24 3 common O DCL AMONS se scaceesaccteseaccnccgeeecanacsehscsacanarnnc esecescecpncgucenceaseasasancan 3 1 IO AGING QO GSP tenet o A A aE a AAA EE ane e ANE 3 2 Before Loading Paper ccccccscccsscceeeeceeeceueccucecueecaeeceueeeaeecaeesseesueesaeesa
164. chnology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted Other precautions for users in California the United States This product contains a CR Coin Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 6 Preface gt Notice Warranty the United States 205c 255c MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY Kyocera Mita America Inc and Kyocera Mita Canada Ltd both referred to as Kyocera warrant the Customer s new Multifunctional Product referred to as MFP and the new accessories installed with the initial installation of the MFP against any defects in material and workmanship for a period of one 1 year or 200 000 copies prints from date of installation whichever first occurs In the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective within the warranty period Kyocera s only obligation and the Customer s exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts Kyocera shall have no obligation to furnish labor This warranty covers Maintenance Kits and the components of Maintenance Kits included with the original MFP for a period of one year or 200 000 copies prints whichever first occurs Maintenance Kits consist of the developing unit the drum unit the transfer belt and the fixing unit Replacement Maintenance Kits have a 90 day Limit
165. crease the adjustment value Increase the adjustment value 1 level at a time from the current value If there is no improvement after the value is increased by 1 level increase by 1 level again If there is still no improvement return the setting to the original value Part of the image is Press the System Menu Counter key periodically faint or blurred Adjustment Maintenance Service Setting MC and decrease the adjustment value Decrease the adjustment value 1 level at a time from the current value If there is no improvement after the value is decreased by 1 level decrease by 1 level again If there is still no improvement return the setting to the original value Tm Press the System Menu Counter key Adjustment Maintenance Service Setting DEV CLN and then press Start Irregular horizontal lines Press the System Menu Counter key appear in the image Adjustment Maintenance Service Setting MC and decrease the adjustment value Decrease the adjustment value 1 level at a time from the current value If there is no improvement after the value is decreased by 1 level decrease by 1 level again If there is still no improvement return the setting to the original value The altitude is 1500 m or Press the System Menu Counter key higher and irregular Adjustment Maintenance Service horizontal white lines appear Setting Altitude Adjustment
166. creen Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration 2 System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Local Authentication Local User List 1 1 1 Simple login settings gt Local User Authorization Off GB0435 00 2 Edit or delete a user To edit a user System Menu Counter 10 10 Simple Login Simple Login Setup 1 1 1 Select the user whose information you wish to edit and press Menu and then Edit System Menu Counter 10 10 i T is Is 03 User D 04User E 02 User C 05 None 1 1 06 None 07 None 08 None GB0712_01 2 Edit the user Name 10 10 User User A Password Login Off Icon Male 1 GB0739 00 User 10 10 Name User M Password Login Off GB0739 00 NC EM INCREASE 10 10 Input B Limit 32 10 10 Local User gt 1 1 Select the user to use for simple logins from Local User or Network User Password Login 10 10 User User a Password Login Off Icon Male 1 GB0739 00 9 50 System Menu Counter 10 10 Off On 1 1 L7 NN d GB0710 01 GB0738 00 GB0057 62 GB0740 00 GB0736 01 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Icon 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 gt r 1 y 2 2 y aiii 1 ayers 2 D Basket Piano Guitar
167. creen Store File Screen Functions pd Favorites GB0055 00 GB0096 00 In this guide steps where touch panel keys are used are outlined in red E g Select Zoom Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 bi CECI Paper M Density NS Selection Auto Normal 0 of L pm fJ a A i P2233 Collate LO oe _ Offset 1 sided 1 sided Off Collate GB0001 01 Procedures consisting of a series of operation panel and or touch panel operations are numbered as follows E g Select Functions and then EcoPrint Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 EE Copes 1 u comm pee Sa Color Selection Paper Zoom al Density Full Color N Selection eae I Original Image Auto 100 Normal 0 a7 Text Photo ee M m gt ip EcoPrint a Duplex Combine am Collate 4 DIE _ Offset a MU AUJUSLITIETIL 1 sided gt 1 sided Off Collate I B GB0001 01 GB0002 01 Add Edi Shortcut Use v or A to scroll up and down Preface gt About this Operation Guide Originals and Paper Sizes This section explains the notation used in this guide when referring to sizes of originals or paper sizes As with A4 B5 and Letter which may be used either in the horizontal or vertical direction horizontal direction is
168. croll up and down GB0102 00 Document Box gt Functions for Document Box Storing Size Select size of image to be stored Same as Original Size Store an image the same size as the original Metric Select from A3 A4 A5 A5 R B4 B5 B6 Folio or 216 x 340 mm Select from Ledger Letter Legal Statement 11 x 15 or Oficio II Select from 8K 16K Hagaki or Oufukuhagaki Relationship between Original Size Storing Size and Zoom Original Size page 3 32 Storing Size and Zoom page 3 56 are related to each other Refer to the following table Original Size and the size you wish to the same different store as are Original Size Specify as necessary Specify as necessary Storing Size Select Same as Original Select the required size Zoom Select 100 or Auto Select Auto NOTE When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size and select the Zoom 100 you can store the image as the actual size No Zoom 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB on page 7 5 display the screen Ready to store in Box 10 10 Ready to store in Box 10 10 gum urn sn py Original Size T File L 2 sided Scan Auto __ Format Book Resolution 3 Original Orientation PDF 1 sided 300x300dpi Top Edae on Top Wu o i EB Mixed Size Originals all Density J caen Name off ab Entry yx Storing Size Normal doc Zag Same as
169. cument Processor 2 2 dpi 11 24 Duplex 4 8 E EcoPrint 11 24 Copy 4 15 Printer 9 16 Emulation 11 24 Selection 9 16 Encrypted PDF Password 7 11 Energy Saving Control Function 1 12 Energy Star Program 1 12 Enhanced WSD 9 21 11 24 Environment 1 3 Error Handling 9 14 Expansion Memory 11 3 F Favorites 3 14 Editing and Deleting 3 18 Registering 3 14 Using 3 20 FAX Kit 11 3 File Format 3 57 File Name Entry 3 62 File Separation 6 39 First Print Time 11 19 11 20 Front Cover 2 2 FTP 11 24 FTP Client Transmission Protocol Detail 9 20 FTP Encrypted TX 6 41 FTP Server Reception Protocol Detail 9 20 G Glossary 11 23 GPL LGPL 1 9 Grayscale 3 59 11 24 H Handles 2 2 2 4 Help 11 24 Help Screen 3 28 Host Name 9 18 HTTP Protocol Detail 9 20 HTTPS Protocol Detail 9 20 HTTP Security 9 22 Hue Adjustment 4 16 Inner Tray 2 2 Interface Block 9 22 Interrupt Copy 4 20 IP Address 11 24 Setup 9 18 IPP Protocol Detail 9 20 IPP over SSL Protocol Detail 9 20 IPP Security 9 22 IPSec Setup 9 22 Job Canceling 3 29 Checking History 8 6 Checking Status 8 2 Details of the Status Screens 8 3 Pause and Resumption 8 3 Sending the Log History 8 7 Job Accounting 9 58 Adding an Account 9 63 Counting the Number of Pages Printed 9 69 Default Setting 9 73 Editing and Deleting 9 65 Enabling Disabling 9 61 Login 9 62 Logout 9 62 Printing an Accounting Report 9 71 Restricting the Use of the Machine 9 67 Job
170. d in Two sided to Two sided are Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Executive Statement R Oficio Il A3 A4 R A4 A5 R B4 B5 R B5 Folio and 216 x 340 mm The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in Book to Two sided mode Original Ledger Letter R Statement R A3 A4 R A5 R B4 B5 R and 8K Paper Letter A4 and B5 The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in Two sided to One sided and Book to One sided Original Ledger Letter R Statement R A3 A4 R A5 R B4 B5 R and 8K Paper Letter A4 B5 and 16K You may change paper size and reduce or enlarge copy to match that size 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen 2 10 10 Copies 1 i E z Cra IM Paper OW Zoom ll Density LS Selection ums Auto 100 Normal 0 PES Combine gi Collate Offset Collate Of Functions Pd Favorites GB0001 01 2 Select the function 1 sided gt gt 1 sided 1 sided gt gt 2 sided 2 sided gt gt 1 sided or 2 sided gt gt 2 sided 10 10 gr 2 sided 1 sided 1 sided 1 sid 1 sided gt gt 2 sided g amp 2 sided 2 sided Others e a Others GB0009 00 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 1 sided gt gt 1 sided 1 cided gt gt 7 cided 2 sided 1 sided 4 2 sided 2 sided Others Cancel GB0009 00 4 9
171. d then ON Optional Memory Optional Memory Description When optional memory is installed select the memory allocation scheme based on the application in which you are using the equipment Value Printer Priority Normal Copy Priority A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Date Timer Configures settings related to the date and time Date Time Description Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine If you perform Send as E mail the date and time set here will be displayed on the header Value Year 2000 to 2037 Month 1 to 12 Day 1 to 31 Hour 00 to 23 Minute 00 to 59 Second 00 to 59 Date Format Select the display format of year month and date The year is displayed in Western notation Value Month Day Year Day Month Year Year Month Day Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT Choose the nearest listed location from the list Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time automatically reset settings and return to the default setting Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not Value Off On NOTE The time allowed to elapse before the panel is reset is set with the Pane Reset Timer Auto Sleep Set Auto Sleep to automatically enter Sleep Mode after a period of inactivity Value Off On ry NOTE Refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 21 for Sleep The time allowed t
172. de jal Auto Color Auto Color Automatically recognizes whether a document is color or black amp white and then scans the document Full Full Color Scans all documents in full color Color Black amp White Scans all documents in black amp white Black amp White 4 Selecting the functions Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 mm Select the copier s functions to use BE Paper Sq Zoom lll density Press Functions to display other functions NER Selection e rpm HL cmn L Refer to Copying Functions on page 4 4 r um x Dupl Combi m Collate 5 uplex b ombine ec sided i sided Off Collate GB0001 01 Copying gt Basic Operation 5 Entering the copy quantity O Q Cl NOTE o Q Press the Clear key to change the copy quantity O O O O O Q 6 Start copying Sta rt Press the Start key to start copying 4 3 Copying gt Copying Functions Copying Functions Copy screen shows the commonly used functions By pressing Functions other selectable functions will be shown as a list Use v or A to select the function What do you want to do Specify the paper size and type Reference Page Paper Selection gt page 3 41 Reduce or enlarge the original Zoom gt page 4 5 Adjust the density Density gt page 3 50 Copy on both sides of the paper Duplex page 4 8
173. ded may cause paper jams Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator see the figure When loading the paper keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up The paper length and width guides must be adjusted to the paper size Loading the paper without adjusting these guides may cause skewed feeding and paper jams Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely against the paper If there is a gap readjust the guides to fit the paper 3 4 Common Operations gt Loading Paper Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray The multi purpose tray will hold up to 100 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m or up to 25 sheets of plain paper 80 g m lager than A4 The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A3 to A6 and Hagaki and from Ledger to Statement R 8K 16K R and 16K Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper Q IMPORTANT When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled or colored paper always specify the media type setting Refer to Cassette MP Tray Settings on page 9 8 If you are using a paper weight of 106 g m or more set the media type to Thick The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows e A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m recycled paper or color paper 100 sheets e B4orlarger plain paper 80 g m recycled paper or color paper 25 sheets e Hagaki 20 sheet Envelope D
174. delete a shortcut To edit a shortcut 1 Select the shortcut type and number you wish to edit 10 10 10 10 Private Shortcut 1 Private Shortcut 2 Shared Shortcut 1 Shared Shortcut 2 Cancel Next gt GB0790 01 GB0796 00 2 Edit the shortcut No Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Number Shortcut 1 Name Shortcut 1 1 Functions Zoom d GB0794 00 GB0797 00 t Name 10 10 Input 10 Limit 24 Number Shortcut 1 Name Shortcut 1 1 1 M z e e N LQ e eo a o GB0797 00 3 24 Common Operations gt Shortcuts 3 Register the shortcut 10 10 Number Shortcut 1 Name Shortcut 1 GB0797 00 To delete 10 10 10 10 Private Shortcut 1 Private Shortcut 2 Shared Shortcut 1 1 1 Shared Shortcut 2 GB0790 01 GB0798 00 n d Select the shortcut you wish to delete Using Shortcuts The registered shortcut will be displayed on the Copy Send FAX Print from USB Memory or Save to USB Memory or Polling Box initial screen Pressing Shortcut will switch to the registered function s screen Requires the optional fax kit Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 T ET 1 Copies 1 Jel _ Paper Zoom amp all Density a Selection Auto 100 Normal 0 uud ee FC Duplex Combine xm COllate 5j ui Offset 1 sided 1
175. denotes the IP address 133 210 2 0 with a 24 bit prefix network section This new network address section originally part of the host address made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address When you enter the subnet mask be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other over a network TCP IP IPv6 TCP IP IPv6 is based on the current Internet protocol TCP IP IPv4 IPv6 is the next generation Internet protocol and expands the available address space which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4 while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission TWAIN Technology Without Any Interested Name A technical specification for connecting scanners digital cameras and other image equipment to the computers The TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software TWAIN is adopted on a large amount of graphic software e g Adobe Photoshop and OCR software USB Universal Serial Bus 2 0 A USB interface standard for Hi Speed USB 2 0 The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps This machine is equipped with USB 2 0 for high speed data transfer WIA Windows Imaging Acquisition A function to import images supported afte
176. destinations Ready to send Address Book All Iva 10 10 Vi o01 Sales department 1 0123456 ec j002 Sales department 1 abc c 1 1 LJ 003 Support department 0234567 am 004 c Support department BOX Destinations can be changed later Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6 22 N GB0426_00 sending gt Specifying Destination Choosing by One Touch Key Select the destination using the One Touch Keys NOTE For more information on adding One Touch keys refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key on page 6 33 1 2 3 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send 10 10 Dest 0 Recall Check uu eae One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book EE M M M 1 2 z _ E mail Folder FAX Vv GB0055 00 Select the destination 10 10 003 No Use WV or AN to scroll up and down 004 None 006 None 007 None 009 Non 012 No Cancel Press the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered Multiple One Touch Keys can be selected 010 None GB0095 00 You can specify a one touch key by one touch number by pressing the Quick No Search key Accept the destination Ready to send 10 10 004 None 005 None 006 None 1 9 007 None 008 None 009 N
177. dit Shortcu Use v or AN to scroll up and down GB0044 00 Copying gt Interrupt Copy Interrupt Copy This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately When interruption copy ends the machine resumes the paused print jobs NOTE If the machine is left unused for 60 seconds in interrupt copy mode interrupt copying is automatically cancelled and printing resumes You can change the delay until interrupt copying is cancelled Change the delay as required For more information refer to Interrupt Clear Timer on page 9 24 The interrupt copy function may be unavailable due to insufficient memory depending on the manner in which the equipment is being utilized 1 Press the Interrupt key I EE for interrupt Full Color JA 10 10 am m m m m mm m mm m m Copes 1 nte rru pt Paper Zoom ail lm Density LS Selection Auto 100 Normal 0 gt um und o ee fr LJ Offset ae sided gt gt 1 sided sided Collate 1 idm 2 Duplex e Combine gi Collate GB0001 99 The current print job is temporarily interrupted 2 Make an interrupt copy 1 Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt copy and configure the copy settings 2 Press the Start key to start interrupt copying Start 3 End the interrupt copy Interrupt When interrupt copying ends press the I
178. dures of the toner container is same for every color The procedures here represent the yellow toner container 1 Remove the old toner container 10 2 Troubleshooting gt Toner Container Replacement 2 Prepare the new toner container 10 3 Troubleshooting gt Waste Toner Box Replacement Waste Toner Box Replacement When the touch panel displays Check waste toner box replace the waste toner box 1 Remove the old waste toner box 2 mun uris 2 Troubleshooting gt Replacing Staples Replacing Staples If a message displays indicating that staples have run out the staple cartridge holder need to be replenished with Staples NOTE If the Staple Unit runs out of staples contact your service representative or the place of purchase 4 Remove the staple cartridge holder D T A After the cartridge holder returned to the original position open the staple cover and remove the cartridge holder 2 Remove the empty staple cartridge NOTE The staple cartridge can only be removed when it contains no more staples 3 Insert the new staple cartridge 4 Re install the staple cartridge holder 3 The staple cartridge holder will click into place when it has been inserted correctly 10 5 Troubleshooting gt Cleaning Cleaning Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality A Caution For safety always unplug the power cord be
179. e Original Orientation amp F4 Send Configurations Duplex Setting Resolution 200dp Image Quality Text Image Adjustment Density off 0 Prevent Bleed through The settings that appear in the TWAIN dialog box are as follows Original Configurations Original Size Detail Select the scan size of the original Original Orientation Specify the type of binding Send Configurations Duplex Setting Specify whether the original is one sided or two sided Image Quality Settings Color Settings Resolution Select the color mode Select the resolution Image Quality Select the image quality according to the type of original Image Adjustment Density Select the exposure Select the Auto button to have the exposure set automatically based on the original Prevent Bleed through 6 45 Hide background colors and image bleed through when scanning thin original sending gt Scanning using TWAIN Detail Configuration This is used to check current settings and store frequently used settings When the Configuration button is clicked a setting screen opens with buttons for Details Add current configuration and Delete selected configuration Details Current settings can be checked Add current Save current settings with a name and comment configuration Delete selected Delete
180. e Job Log s 1 Jere Waiting GB0052_01 Pause All Print Jobs Use V or A to scroll up and down Press either of Print Job Log Send Job Log or Store Job Log to check the log 2 Check the log 10 10 0011 Fj docd000112010081817 Completed OK 0010 doc0000102010081815 xx Canceled 1 3 0009 doc0000092010081815 amp Completed S3 0008 doc Error EB 4 Displays details for individual jobs GB0186 00 Press Close to exit the screen NOTE The job history can be sent by E mail For details refer to Sending the Log History on page 8 7 N Status Job Cancel gt Sending the Log History Sending the Log History You can send the log history by e mail You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached 1 Display the screen 10 10 Quick Setup Wizard A Language Report lt gt System Menu Counter Q 1 GB0054 00 Report Print Admin Report Settings Result Report Setting Sending Log History Back Vv GB0560 00 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Enter login user name and password 10 10 Login User Name Login Password Keyboard p d GB0723 00 2 Configure the function 10 1
181. e and login password regularly for your security 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 34 display the screen 9 37 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration System Menu Counter User Login 10 10 Lacal Authenticatian Simple login settings Local User Authorization GB0435 00 Enter the user information User Name Input B Limit 32 ABC Aa GB0057 51 GB0057 53 Access Level 10 10 Administrator User e Select the user access privilege GB0445 00 Check the settings System Menu Counter Login ocal User List ei amp Admin Admin 2500 A t3 DeviceAdmin gt GB0440_00 9 Check the settings and change or add information as needed User Name Select the item that you want to change User Name User A Login User Name 10 10 GB0446 00 e 9 38 Input 6 3 2 Limit 32 GB0057_26 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Login User Name Select the item that you want to change 10 10 User Name User A Login User Name User A Login Password he htt A ht Account Name Others VY el GB0446_00 Login Password Select the item that you want to change 10 10 User Name User A User af Login Password BEER EAL AAA Account Name Others Login User Name
182. e creator of the document 10 10 GB0652 00 3 Select the document 10 10 Mi Ei doc 100831170850 Displays details for individual documents _ Sjdoc 100831170814 1 1 doc 100831170659 Gu _ doc 100831170519 GB0654 00 Cancel 4 Print and delete the document To print the document 10 10 10 10 ME doc 100831170850 i aT doc 100831170814 Gu 1 1 __ doc 100831170659 A doc 100831170519 GB0654_00 GB0003 00 opecify the number of copies to print as desired When using the number of copies specified with print job select Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer To delete Document Box 10 10 V B doc 100831170850 _ Sjdoc 100831170814 _ doc 100831170659 1 1 i L doc 100831170519 Select the document you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon t GB0654 00 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents This setting specifies that documents such as Private Printing or Proof and Hold Printing saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time Off Temporary documents are not automatically deleted However the temporary documents will be deleted when the power is turned off 1 hour Documents are deleted after 1 hour
183. e login settings gt GB0435 02 2 Select the authentication method 10 10 Local Authentication Network Authentication E CU c O UR le Pa t GB0436_00 When selecting Network Authentication Select the server type System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Server Type Kerberos Host Name S 2 S oe l l 4 a d c 05 0 Enter the host name System Menu Counter 10 10 Input 3 4 2 Limit 64 Server Type Kerberos Domain Name 1 GB0437_00 GB0057 24 NN d Up to 64 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters 9 35 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Enter a domain name 10 10 2 Inputs Limit 256 Host Name d When selecting NTLM or Kerberos as the server type enter a domain name of 256 characters or less GB0437_02 GB0057 25 Enter the port number System Menu Counter 10 10 10 10 Server Type 1 65535 Host Name Port 2 3 Cancel OK d GB0437 01 GB0439 00 m d When selecting Ext as the server type enter the port number Press Save 10 10 Server Type Ext Host Name abc Port 9093 GB0437 01 Cancel NOTE If the login user name and password are rejected check the following settings Network Authentication setting of the machine Us
184. e nana sanare nana is 8 3 Checking Job TSCM esac 8 6 Sending the Log HISTONY 65s T u u 8 7 Setting the Destination T 8 8 Automatic Log History Transmission sees 8 9 Manual Log History Transmission essesssssssssssesseeeeen nennen 8 9 Setting E mail SUDJEC m RTRT M 8 10 Soweit 8 11 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper cccceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeees 8 13 Setup Registration and User Management 9 1 System Men RR eet denen eric Eai 9 2 Operation Method E 9 2 System Menu Settings xssisassiwesesaisinigeacq uda bt smi porum idi eben cusa Gd Mina EC opa Na dee ncaseodeen 9 3 LNA qe E 9 5 pi A n ae 9 5 USer PrTODOED sere ea Pim iub E IH IMNOO LUI MUN IP DINE BuU DK aD NNNM TU NUN 9 7 Cassette MP Tray Settings esssssssssssssssssssseee nennen nennen nennen nnn nnns 9 8 SOARING Me E 9 9 S0 cC 9 15 spo 9 15 xili aeetecc O E
185. e on Top EJ Top Edge on Left Left Right d Cancel OK GB0010_01 4 11 GB0015_03 Copying gt Copying Functions Combine Combine 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 copied page You can select the page layout or the type of boundary lines around the pages Copies 2 originals onto each page Copies 4 originals onto each page Other Combine 2 in 1 L to R T to B Copies 2 originals onto each page Settings 2 in 1 R to L B to T 4 in 1 Right then Down Copies 4 originals onto each page 4 in 1 Left then Down Border Line Sets the boundary line type to a solid line dotted line or positioning mark Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction NOTE Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A3 A4 R A4 A5 R B4 B5 R B5 Folio 216 x 340 mm Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Oficio Il 8K 16K R and 16K When placing the original on the platen be sure to copy the originals in page order 4 12 1 Copying gt Copying Functions Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen 2 Ready to copy Full Color r 10 10 Copies i Paper Selection Auto il Density Duplex r Collate 1 sided 1 sided 2 Select the function
186. e used for a while e Store paper sealed in the original package and box Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors Before using paper that has been stored keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours e Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat sunlight or dampness Other Paper Specifications Porosity The density of the paper fibers Stiffness Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine causing jams Curl Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened When paper passes through the fixing unit it curls upward slightly To deliver flat printouts load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray Static electricity During printing paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres Choose paper that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together Whiteness Paper whiteness affects print contrast Use whiter paper for sharper brighter copies Quality Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square edges are rough sheets are uncut or edges or corners are crushed In order to prevent these problems be especially careful when you cut the paper yourself Packaging Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes Ideally the packaging itself should ha
187. ed Warranty This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser referred to as the Customer of a new Kyocera MFP in the United States of America or Canada based upon the country of purchase In order to obtain performance of this warranty the Customer must immediately notify the Authorized Kyocera Dealer from whom the product was purchased If the Kyocera Dealer is not able to provide service write to Kyocera at the address below for the name and address of the Authorized Kyocera Dealer in your area or check Kyocera s website at http www kyoceramita com This warranty does not cover MFPs or accessories which a have become damaged due to operator negligence misuse accidents improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress b have used parts or supplies which are not genuine Kyocera brand parts or supplies c have been installed or serviced by a technician not employed by Kyocera or an Authorized Kyocera Dealer or d have had the serial number modified altered or removed This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights The Customer may also have other rights which vary from state to state or province to province Neither the seller nor any other person is authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of Kyocera THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION
188. eesseeesaeesaaes 3 2 Loading Paper in the Cassettes ccccccceccceecceeeceseeceeeceeeceeeceueesaeesseesagesegeeseeesnees 3 3 Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray cccccccecccseeceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeesaeeseees 3 5 Loading COOMA JM 3 7 Placing Originals on the Platen cccccccccceceseeeseeeceeeceeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeaees 3 7 Loading Originals in the Document Processor eese 3 8 Checking the Equipment s Serial Number ccccccccceccceeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeaeeseeesaeeaes 3 10 Checking the Counter ccccccccccccecccseeceeeceecceeeceeeceueceueesueceueecaeecaeecsueceueesaeesueessueseansaaes 3 11 Were iKoreroU qr n 3 12 Boo GRE UMEN 3 12 Copying Printing LOGOUT c te 3 13 moi MT 3 14 FREGISIGMING PAVOMIGS T 3 14 Editing and Deleting Favorites ssseeseessessseseeensenreennn nennen 3 18 SMO FAVO gans o 3 20 SNOU aa E E E fetes E 3 22 Registernng rege Mio UL NER ce eee ene eee 3 22 Editing and Deleting Shortcuts 2 0 00 ccc ceccccececeeeeeeeeee cece eeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeaeeeaueeseeesaeees 3 24 JSN NON UNG NETTE TE m ME
189. elapses 10 18 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages S Error Message Scanner memory is full Checkpoints Corrective Actions Scanning cannot be performed due to insufficient memory of scanner Only one copy of the scanned pages is available Press Continue to print send or store the scanned pages Press Cancel to cancel the printing job Reference Page Send error An error has occurred during transmission The job is canceled Press End Refer to Responding to Send Error for the error code and corrective actions Set cassette Have the paper width guide and paper length guide been loaded properly Load the paper width guide and paper length guide properly so that there is no space between the guides and the paper Staple is empty Has any of the document finisher run out of staples If the staples are depleted the machine will stop and the location of staple depletion will be indicated on the touch panel Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to replace the staple case Press Continue to print without stapling Press Cancel to cancel the job Staple jam If a staple jam occurs the machine will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the touch panel Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed staple System error System error has occurred Follow the instructions on the touch
190. enanats 2 9 COMME CUING C ADIOS mara E E E E E E 2 10 Gonnecung LAN CADIS sisssnassasdcsanocsrsdchanmediancanescsanotiuassumtshuunsniaaenhumsenienieGuxisisaantuninaiahiastneaunteainteunssuminen 2 10 CONN ECUNG WSC AOS 2 11 Connecting the Power Cable ccccccccccssceceseeceeseceuscseuecccsecessececeusesaueeseusensueessueeteueeseseeeeseseesaneeneetenes 2 11 POW GG OM OU M 2 12 PO SO Y 2 12 xus M HR 2 12 Jnillgtezere ntu qe 2 14 Healing Printer Bg SP E NOR 2 14 Seling TWAIN DIVO 2 18 SEUNG VIA DIVO GMT E 2 19 minis pe erc is Wi lareo p NER TE Om 2 20 Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode ssssssssssssseseeeeenenen nennen nnne nnns rne nns 2 20 Sligep and AUTO SIGOD oM 2 21 Machine Setup VVIZ ANG E 2 22 COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail sees sns snas 2 23 xs pellere soap PR umm 2 24 2 1 Preparation before Use gt Part Names Part Names Machine Document Processor Platen Original Size Indicator Plates Slit Glass Operation Panel Inner Tray Front Cover Cassette 1 USB Memory Slot A1 10 Right Cover 1 11 Handles 12 Job S
191. end Log History Auto Sending Off Destination Job Log Subject GB0578 00 2 Enter an E mail subject Limit 60 Inputs B 1 GB0057 23 Up to 60 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N 8 10 Status Job Cancel gt Check of Device Status Check of Device Status Configure the devices lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status You can also control devices depending on their status 4 Display the screen 10 10 Status s Job Cancel Frees Be Job Log lt gt 2 4 lis Job Log 2 and down Pause All Print Jobs Status Job Cancel fere Running GB0052 01 FAX Waiting Toner Status OK feos Status No Paper VY Pause All Print Jobs Status Job Cancel 10 10 GB0052 02 USB Keyboard 2 Invalid Staple Pause All PrintJobs GB0052 03 Select the device you wish to check 2 Check the status Scanner 10 10 GB0189 00 The status of an original scanning in the document processor or the error information paper jam opened cover etc is displayed Status Job Cancel gt Check of Device Status Printer GB0190 00 Error information such as paper jam out of toner or out of paper and status such as waiting or printing are displayed FAX Option 10 10 G
192. ent FAX Displays the FAX screen El Puts the machine into Sleep Mode Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode lt System Menu Counter Status Job Cancel Copy ja PANU Ke e Color Favorites Send me vt B Black amp d White Paaa F AX a El Select the color mode Auto Color Automatically recognizes whether a document is color or black amp white and then scans the document Full Color Scans all documents in full color Black amp White Scans all documents in black amp white Interrupt Ready to copy Full Color 10 coy i coy c1 Paper 2 Zoom il Density Selection 100 Normal 0 Combine c Collate Offset Collate hd Favorites Lit when the machine s main power is on Were Mili NAST lam Power KO e o Reset Lights when there is paper in the job separator tray 8l Job Separator Touch panel Displays buttons for configuring machine settings Numeric keys Enter numbers and symbols Quick No Clear Search Enter le 333 eJ Processing Memory Attention Processing Blinks while printing or sending Memory Blinks while the machine is accessing the fax memory or USB memory generalpurpose item Attention Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped Clears entered numbers and characters Returns settings to their default states Quick No Search Specifies registered
193. entication Local User List 1 Simple Login Setup 1 1 2 1 1 Simple login settings System Menu Counter i 3 03 None 04 None 05 None Local User Authorization Off GB0435 00 1 3 07 None 08 None 06 None rd GB0712 00 Select a key with no registered user and press 2 Enter the user information 1 Select the type of user 10 10 Local User Network User gt E o 2 Select a user Local user ios iis Q T Searches by user name amp DeviceAdmin 2500 f User A ESEK a 1 2 UserB 2222 cw amp User C 3333 S 8 Allows you to search for a Displays details for individual users user and sorts results 9 47 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Network user 10 10 E Input 3 p 1 Limit64 Ji Login User Name 2 ABC a A e Keyboard q w e r t y u i o Login Password a S d f g h j k Keyboard jsjs t s 1 i T System Menu Counter 10 10 GB0704 00 GB0057 31 Input 3 Limit64 Login User Name Login Password Keyboard lt Back Next gt Cancel M e N i e eo a o GB0704 01 i System Menu Counter Login User Name Abe Keyboard Login Password E lie GB0704 02 Enter the Login User Name and Login Password 3 Enter the login user name to use with
194. enu followed by Edit lt GB0422_01 GB0430_00 t To delete System Menu Counter a 12 UU Sales uus None vuz None i department 1 1 005 None 004 None 006 None 007 None 008 None 009 None 010 None 011 None 012 None Menu Select the One Touch Key you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon ell o N N x o a 0 6 35 sending gt Sending Functions Sending Functions Send screen shows the commonly used functions By pressing Functions other selectable functions will be shown as a list Use V or A to select the function What do you want to do Select the file format for images being sent Reference Page File Format gt page 3 57 Specify the original size Original Size gt page 3 32 Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction Original Orientation gt page 3 34 Send mixed size originals Mixed Size Originals gt page 3 35 Automatically scan 2 sided originals 2 sided Book Original gt page 3 37 Change the size of the image being sent Send each page in a separate file Sending Size page 6 37 File Separation gt page 6 39 Set the resolution at which to scan originals Scan Resolution gt page 3 51 Adjust the density Change the color mode for images being sent Density page 3 50 Color Selection page 3 59 Select o
195. eparator Tray oO ON O oa A WO N 2 Preparation before Use gt Part Names 14 15 13 Original Width Guides 14 Original Table 15 Cleaning Cloth Compartment 16 Original Loaded Indicator 17 Toner Container Black 18 Toner Container Magenta 19 Toner Container Cyan 20 Toner Container Yellow 21 Waste Toner Box 22 Paper Width Guide 23 Paper Length Guide 24 Multi Purpose Tray 25 Paper Width Guide 2 3 Preparation before Use gt Part Names 26 Option Interface Slot 2 27 Network Interface Connector 28 USB Interface Connector A2 29 USB Port B1 30 Option Interface Slot 1 31 Scanner Lock 32 Main Power Switch 33 Handles 34 Cassette Heater Switch 2 4 Preparation before Use gt Part Names 35 Top Cover 36 Tray Extension 37 Document Finisher Tray 38 Staple Cover 39 Staple Cartridge Holder 40 Bridge Unit Cover 2 5 Preparation before Use gt Part Names Operation Panel lt gt System Menu Counter Displays the System Menu Counter screen Status Job Cancel Cancel screen Displays the Status Job Displays the Copy screen Copy amp Displays the Interrupt Copy screen Ends operation logs out on the Administration screen Displays the Favorites Screen Displays the screen for sending Send Puts the machine into Low Power Mode Box screen Displays the Docum
196. er account management window appears click Allow You can use either Express Mode or Custom Mode to install the software Express Mode automatically detects connected machines and installs the required software Use Custom Mode if you want to specify the printer port and select the software to be installed For details refer to Custom Installation in the Printer Driver User Guide on the DVD 4 Insert the DVD 2 Display the screen r e Kyocera Product Library Sa o Kyocera Product Library cams KYOCERA THE NEW VALUE FRONTIER KYOCERA THE NEW VALUE FRONTIER Notice By using or installing the device drivers and Software included on this CD ROM you agree to become bound by the terms and conditions of this License Agreement View License Agreement Select Language he z c 2010 KYOCERA MITA Corporation www kyoceramita com h d Click View License Agreement and read the License Agreement 2 14 Preparation before Use gt Installing Software 3 Install using Express Mode 1 Select the print system to be installed NOTE The machine cannot be detected unless it is on If the computer fails to detect the machine verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it is turned on and click Reload If the Windows security window appears click Install this driver software anyway 4 Finish the installation This completes the p
197. er property of the Authentication Server Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine login with any administrator registered in the local user list and correct the settings If the server type is Kerberos only domain names entered in uppercase will be recognized 9 36 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Adding a User This adds a new user You can add Up to 100 users including the default login user name The table below explains the user information to be registered User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list up to 32 characters Login User Name Enter the login user name to login up to 64 characters The same login user name cannot be registered Login Password Enter the password to login up to 16 characters Account Name Add an account where the user belongs The user who registered his her account name can login without entering the account ID Refer to Job Accounting on page 9 58 E mail Address The user can register his her E mail address up to 128 characters The registered address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E mail function Access Level Select Administrator or User for user access privileges My Panel Registers settings for individual users Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in Local Au
198. es and documentation as requested You agree that you will not modify alter disassemble decrypt reverse engineer or decompile the Software Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety 90 days after delivery the Software will perform in accordance with Monotype Imaging published specifications and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs errors and omissions The parties agree that all other warranties expressed or implied including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability are excluded Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts upon their return to Monotype Imaging In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits lost data or any other incidental or consequential damages or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces Massachusetts U S A law governs this Agreement 10 You shall not sublicense sell lease or otherwise transfer the Software and or Typefaces without the prior written consent of Monotype Imaging 11 Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252 227 7013 subdivision b 3 ii or subparagraph c 1 ii as appropriate
199. es can also be registered in the system menu 1 Display the screen Send 1 2 Adds a new destination Select the address type Group EM ae e gt am 6 24 10 10 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 Dest 0 Check 2 Recall One VEN One Touch Key m Book Ext Address Book E mail s Functions GB0055 00 1 2 to send Address Book All IYr 10 10 001 Sales department 1 0123456 _ 001 Sales department 1 abc 002 c Support department 0234567 ca J002 E Support department GB0426 01 Use v or A to scroll up and down GB0396 01 Select the registration method GB0419 01 sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book 4 Enter the destination name Sales department 1 Input 18 T3 1 Limit 32 GB0057 11 Cancel Up to 32 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters 5 Enter the address number Select the item that you want to change 10 10 10 10 Name Sales department 1 Address Number Auto 1 2 d 000 250 E mail Address n Press or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number 1 250 GB0217 01 Cancel OK GB0078 02 Address Number is an ID for a destination You can select any available number out of 200 numbers for contacts a
200. esh when images show streaking with white lines Takes about 120 seconds Press Start to perform Drum Refresh NOTE Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done Calibration Laser Scanner Cleaning Adjust color drift or hue of printed image in the most appropriate color Press Start to perform Calibration Press OK after Calibration is complete NOTE Perform Color Registration when the color drift is not adjusted even after performing Calibration and perform Gray Adjust if the color hue is not improved Remove white and color streaks from the image Press Start to perform Laser Scanner Cleaning Press OK after Laser Scanner Cleaning is complete DP Adjustment Adjust scan action of the document processor Place the adjustment original in the document processor Press Start and adjustment begins NOTE This adjustment is for DP Leading edge and DP center adjust Use this adjustment when the copy is skewed when using the Document Processor or when advised by a Service Technician Call Service to obtain the adjustment original If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately move to the function screen and press the Reset key 9 26 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Color Registration Procedure Normal registration and detailed settings are available for Color Registration Color drift can be largely co
201. etails for individual applications 2 Select Official and enter the license key using the numeric keys 10 10 10 10 Trial 1 GB0608 00 GB0609 00 el l su Some applications do not require you to enter a license key To use the application as a trial select Trial Q IMPORTANT If you change the date time while using an application you will no longer be able to use the application Appendix gt Character Entry Method Character Entry Method To enter characters for a name use the on display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below NOTE QWERTY QWERTZ and AZERTY are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard Press the System Menu Counter key Common Settings and then Keyboard Layout to choose desired layout QWERTY layout is used here as an example You may use another layout following the same steps Entry Screens Lower case Letter Entry Screen Abc GB0057 E01 Display 5 6 7 Inputs 11 12 Description Displays entered characters Keyboard Press the character to enter ABC Symbol Select the characters that are entered To enter symbols or numbers select Symbol A a a A Press to switch between upper case and lower case Cursor Key Input Limit Display Press to move the cursor on the display Displays maximum number of characters and the number of cha
202. etimes have to wait until receiving the next data This is the auto form feed timeout When the preset timeout passes the machine automatically put paper out However no output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed Auto IP Auto IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup However DHCP requires a DHCP server Auto IP is a server less method of choosing an IP address IP addresses between 169 254 0 0 to 169 254 255 255 are reserved for Auto IP and assinged automatically Auto Paper Selection A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at printing Auto Sleep A mode designed for electrical power saving activated when the machine is left unused or data transfer for a specific period In Sleep mode power consumption is kept to a minimum Bonjour Bonjour also known as zero configuration networking is a service that automatically detects computers devices and services on an IP network Bonjour because an industry standard IP protocol is used allows devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353 If a firewall is enabled the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets If Bonjour does not run stably check the firewall
203. etric for the unit for paper dimensions 9 14 Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter 9 15 characters USB Keyboard Type Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use 9 15 Copy Configures settings for copying functions 9 15 Send Configures settings for sending functions 9 15 Document Box Configures settings related to the Job Box and Sub Address Box For details on Job Box refer to Printing on page 5 1 and for details on Sub Address Box refer to the Operation Guide for FAX kit FAX Configures settings for fax functions Refer to the Operation Guide for FAX kit Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Item Address Book One Touch Description Configures Address Book and One Touch Key settings For details on Address Book refer to Registering Destinations in the Address Book on page 6 24 and for details on One Touch Key refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key on page 6 33 Reference Page User Login Job Accounting Configures settings related to machine management For details on User Login refer to User Login Administration on page 9 33 and for details on Job Accounting refer to Job Accounting on page 9 58 Printer Printing from computers settings are generally made on the application 9 16 software screen However the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize
204. ette 1 to 3 Multi Purpose Tray Paper Selection Set the default paper selection Value Auto Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as originals Default Paper Source Select paper source set by Default Paper Source Media for Auto Color Media for Auto B amp W Select a default media type for auto paper selection when Auto is selected of Paper Selection If Plain is selected the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected Select All Media Types for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size Value All Media Types Plain Transparency Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick Coated High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Description Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched Preprint and Letterhead punch holes might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions In such a case select Adjust Print Direction to adjust the print direction When paper orientation is not important select Speed Priority Example copying on Letterhead Original Cassette Paper Original Finished Cassette Multi Pu urpose Tray Value Adjust Print Direction Speed Priority Media Type Setting Select the med
205. ettings 1 Display the screen Use V or AN to scroll up and down System Menu Counter 10610 lt gt System Menu Counter jy Aciestmenymainenance 00000 i System Menu Counter Correcting Black Line Display Brightness GB0054 04 3 Color Registration gt System Menu Counter 10 10 lone Curves ii del I A ai ia Lei ecc Iu ees pese niu GB0629 01 GB0641 00 2 Print the chart 10 10 Registration GB0642 01 A chart is printed On the chart for each of M magenta C cyan and Y yellow charts for H 1 to 7 and V 1 to 5 are printed 9 30 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Chart Example MH 2 MH 4 MH 7 IGECA13579 IGECA135779 EGE CA 13 5079 IGECA13579 IGECAIL3 5 7 9 IGHEHECA1357 39 IGECA13579 LE E E ME OM M Oke ae i cS LM ato URN pe pr d poc UN pos EAE HFDBO24 8 24 8 eB OG i 8 WroROSAPG HFD S UEAER HFDBO 4 HFDBO 4 ll wi ii ll y T i i vi i vi T v YH 1 YH 2 YH 3 YH 4 YH 5 YH 6 YH 7 IGECA13579 IG ECAITS3S5T79 IGECA13579 IGECA13579 IGECA13579 IGECA13579 HFDBO24 68 HFDBO0O02468 HFDBO02468 24 HFDBO24 8 HFDBO24 68 HFDBO246 A lt E 4 lt j N lt q w A lt D 3 lt wu M M M M j ONINwWEPOWMAH OnNnANOWOND v UD U B P Qf OH o Oi WNvotUl uu o 1UU 0mP oBuuou co Oi NvotU gmunu woONINwWEPOMAH 0 Ovi NN O UJ C 1 f v U0U0PmppPamuaodd o Oc 5NoOolUuUst Jil a lt H Q lt N
206. f Printer Full Color O Copy off Copy Full Color off Cancel Local Authorization Cancel ave GB0446_01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Change the limitations as needed 4 Register the user Select the item that you want to change 10 10 User Name User A Login User Name User A Login Password KOK AK KKK Account Name Others Cancel GB0446_00 9 40 GB0749 00 GB0839 00 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Local User Authorization Enables local user authorization Job use can be prohibited for specific users Set when adding a user see page 9 37 or editing and deleting users see page 9 43 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 34 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Local Authentication Local User List Simple login settings gt Local User Authorization Off GB0435 00 2 Select On 10 10 Off o 1 1 d GB0908 00 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration My Panel Registers settings for individual users Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in Set when Adding a User see page 9 37 or Editing and Deleting Users see page 9 43 Environments in which shortcut can be configured Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel Default Screen Set the screen appearin
207. fer to Media Type Setting on page 9 10 When the paper weight settings shown below are selected the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected Rough Heavy 3 Bond Heavy 3 Thick Extra Heavy Custom 1 to 8 Heavy3 or Extra Heavy Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 10 for selecting Custom 1 8 Description Set the paper size for multi purpose tray Value Metric Select from A3 A4 R A4 A5 R A6 R B4 B5 R B5 B6 R Folio or 216 x 340 mm inch Select from Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Executive or Oficio Il others Select from 8K 16K R 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Hagaki Oufukuhagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 or Custom Size Entry Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes Inch models X 5 83 to 17 in 0 01 increments Y 3 86 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models X 148 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Y 98 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments NOTE For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size refer to Custom Paper a Size on page 9 10 Media Type Set the media type for multi purpose tray Value Plain 105 g m or less Transparency Rough Vellum 64 g m or less Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick 106 g m and more Coated High Quality Custom 1 8 NOTE To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhe
208. fore cleaning the machine Glass Platen Wipe the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent NN NOTE Do not use organic solvents or other strong chemicals Document Processor If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the document processor clean the slit glass with the supplied cleaning cloth NOTE Wipe the slit glasses with the dry accessory cloth Do not use water soap or solvents for cleaning 1 Wipe the slit glass 10 6 Troubleshooting gt Cleaning 2 Wipe the white guide GE g g 4 l TL T 11 f T IE ey S 10 7 Troubleshooting gt Solving Malfunctions Solving Malfunctions The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving If a problem occurs with your machine look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages If the problem persists contact your Service Representative Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page The operation panel does not Is the machine plugged in Plug the power cord into an AC outlet 2 11 respond when the main power switch is turned on Pressing the Start key does Is there a message on the touch Determine appropriate response to the 10 13 not produce printouts panel message and respond accordingly Is the machine in Sleep mode Press t
209. format 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen Send Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 Dest i Check File Format Recall J PDF Uriginar Size 2 bd Auto en Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book 3 Original Orientation MP E y i Top Edge on Top ss v Mixed Size Originals E mail Folder FAX Off 3 GB0081 00 Close Add Edit Shortcu GB0055_00 Use v or A to scroll up and down Scan to USB 10 10 m7 umm he 2 sided J Scan Book Resolution 7 ji 300x300dpi 4 por a L File T Format all Density L File Name J akn Entry Normal 0 doc Cancel GB0096 00 3 57 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 2 Select the file format PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS Ready to send Others GB0082 00 e Others 1 Ready to send 10 10 JPEG Others a Cancel Next gt d GB0082 00 2 Select the file format Ready to send GB0698 00 n 3 Set the image quality 10 10 File Format Image Quality 1 GB0698_00 e 4 Set PDF A 10 10 File Format Image Quality PDF A GB0698_00 e 3 58 Ready to send 10 10 PDF PDF Tie TIFF 1 1 JPEG XPS
210. ftware that is able to run on a variety of operating systems PDF A This is ISO 19005 1 Document management Electronic document file format for long term preservation Part 1 Use of PDF PDF A and is a file format based on PDF 1 4 It has been standardized as ISO 19005 1 and is a specialization of PDF which has been mainly used for printing for long term storage A new part ISO 19005 2 PDF A 2 is currently being prepared POP3 Post Office Protocol 3 A standard protocol to receive E mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet PostScript A page description language developed by Adobe Systems It enables flexible font functions and highly functional graphics allowing higher quality printing The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985 followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two byte languages e g Japanese in 1990 In 1996 Level 3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies PPM prints per minute This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute Printer Driver The software to enable you to print data created on any application software The printer driver for the machine is contained in the DVD enclosed in the package Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine RA Stateless The IPv6 router communicates transmits information s
211. g gt Copying Functions Duplex Print 1 sided or open book originals to 2 sided or 2 sided or open book originals to 1 sided Select the original binding orientation and desired binding orientation 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Prints 1 sided to 1 sided 1 sided gt gt 2 sided Prints 1 sided to 2 sided 2 sided gt gt 1 sided Prints 2 sided to 1 sided 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Prints 2 sided to 2 sided Others Duplex 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Prints 1 sided to 1 sided 1 sided gt gt 2 sided Prints 1 sided to 2 sided 2 sided gt gt 1 sided Prints 2 sided to 1 sided 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Prints 2 sided to 2 sided Book gt gt 1 sided Prints open book originals to 1 sided Prints open book originals to 2 sided Binding in Original If you choose a 2 sided sheet original select the binding edge of the originals If you choose a 2 sided copy select the binding edge of the finished copies If you choose a 2 sided copy of a book select the setting for duplex Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction This item is not displayed when 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Book gt gt 1 sided or Book gt gt 2 sided is selected Copying gt Copying Functions NOTE The paper sizes supporte
212. g Low Power Mode the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode when using the optional fax the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing To resume perform one of the following actions The machine will be ready to operate within 10 seconds Press any key on the operation panel Open the document processor Place originals in the document processor Note that ambient environmental conditions such as ventilation may cause the machine to respond more slowly Auto Low Power Mode Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches the machine into Low Power Mode if left idle for a preset time The default preset time is 3 minutes For more information about configuring settings refer to Low Power Timer on page 9 24 N 2 20 Preparation before Use gt Energy Saver function Sleep and Auto Sleep Power amp C To enter Sleep press the Power key Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save a maximum amount of power except the Main Power indicator This status is referred to as Sleep Vie If print data is received during Sleep the touch panel lights up and printing starts When using the optional fax received data is printed out while the operation panel remains unlit To resume press the Power key The machine will be ready to use within 23 seconds Note that ambient environmental conditions
213. g right after the user logs in default screen Shortcut Select either Shared Shortcut or Private Shortcut Language 10 10 Language English Default Screen Cancel GB0749 00 GB0744 00 Use V or to scroll up and down Default Screen 10 10 Language English Default Screen Copy 1 1 Shortcut Shared Shortcut Document Box Cancel GB0749 00 GB0745 00 Use v or A to scroll up and down When Send or FAX has been selected sets which screen to use as the default screen 10 10 Destination Address Book 1 1 Ext Address Book One Touch ce e l Cancel lt Back ki a o Shortcut System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Shared Shortcut e Private Shortcut Language English Default Screen Copy Shortcut Shared Shortcut 1 1 GB0749 00 GB0750 00 Displays details for individual shortcuts 9 42 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Editing and Deleting Users User properties can be changed and users can be deleted 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 34 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Lacal Authenticatian Simple login settings Local User Authorization GB0435_00 2 Edit or delete a user To edit a user 1 Press for the user
214. generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna ncrease the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help e he use of a non shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited CAUTION The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device contains the module FCC ID E522K0A0540 IC 1059B 2K0A0540 which complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS Gen of IC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Radio Tag Technology In some countries the radio tag te
215. gh temperature Adjust room Adjust the temperature and the humidity 1 3 temp of your room Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Incorrect account ID The account ID was incorrect when processing the job externally The job is canceled Press End Incorrect Login User Name or The login user name or password was Password incorrect when processing the job externally The job is canceled Press End 10 15 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages Error Message Inner tray is full of paper Checkpoints Corrective Actions Remove paper from the inner tray Printing then resumes Reference Page Intermediate transfer unit is not installed Error Message Job Accounting restriction exceeded Checkpoints Is the acceptable printing count restricted by Job Accounting exceeded Replace the intermediate transfer unit r to our specified intermediate transfer unit See the leaflet supplied with intermediate transfer unit When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses Corrective Actions The printing count exceeded the acceptable count restricted by Job Accounting Cannot print any more This job is canceled Press End Reference Page Job separator tray is full of paper K Error Message Is the maximum capacity of the job separator exceeded
216. hCache Peer Discovery Uses WSD O Connect to a Network Projector Core Networking m HOOOOO HOOOOO CIFIXEDYLTDERUEEEITIE I TIWCKLNDIECNENIWIEVIIXITIXTYII K i Kii N File and Printer Sharing F O iSCSI Service L Media Center Extenders O Netlogon Service 0o00 f Allow another program 3 Cancels select the File and Printer Sharing checkbox o g nw Add a port 2 p 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel System and Security and Check firewall status Control Panel Home Y Action Center Review your computer s status and resolve issues System and Securi yt E fl Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer problems Network and Internet Restore your computer to an earlier time Hardware and Sound Programs l Check firewall status Allow a program through Windows Firewall User Accounts and Family Safety f B System Appearance and View amount of RAM and processor speed Check the Windows Experience Index Tis lj Allow remote access Seethe name of this computer I Device Manager Clock Language and Region iy Windows Update P ALI o9 Tce ecb me bin ceed ation nn ne nfi Cli mab Ene comdntan ee ee eee Ee 6 11 Sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Control Panel Home Help protect your computer with Windows Firewall Allow a program or feature Windows Firew
217. han when using On Low Display Brightness Set the brightness of the touch panel Value 1 Darker 2 3 4 Lighter Color Registration When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location color drift during printing may occur Use this function to correct the color position of each of cyan magenta and yellow to resolve color drift For more information refer to the Color Registration Procedure below 9 25 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Tone Curve Adjustment Description After prolonged use or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity the hue of printed color output may shift or color drift may occur Use this function to correct color settings when the color of a finished copy does not match the original NOTE To perform tone curve adjustment verify that either Letter or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette Procedure Press Start and print the first pattern As shown in the illustration place the printed side down on the platen Press Start The first pattern is read and adjustment begins The second pattern is output Confirm that a number 2 is printed on the pattern Place the pattern on the platen in the same way as the first pattern Press Start The second pattern is read and adjustment begins Turn the main power switch off and on The adjustment will be completed after restarting the system Drum Refresh Perform Drum Refr
218. he Power key to recover the 2 21 machine from Sleep mode The machine will be ready to copy within 23 seconds Blank sheets are ejected Are the originals loaded correctly When placing originals on the platen 3 place them face down and align them with the original size indicator plates When placing originals in the 3 9 document processor place them face up Check that the application software is correctly operated Printouts are too light Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper 3 2 If you experience frequent problems 2 4 turn the cassette heater switch on Have you changed the density Select appropriate density level 3 50 9 25 Is the toner distributed evenly within Shake the toner container from side to 10 2 the toner container side about several times Is there a message indicating the Replace the toner container 10 2 addition of toner Is EcoPrint mode enabled Disable EcoPrint mode 4 15 Press the System Menu Counter key Adjustment Maintenance Service Setting DEV CLN and then press Start Run Laser Scanner Cleaning 9 26 Make sure the paper type setting is 9 8 correct the paper being used Printouts are too dark Have you changed the density Select appropriate density level 3 50 9 25 The background density is Run Background Density Adjustment 3 54 obtrusive 9 25 Printouts have a moire Is the original a printed photograph Set the image quality to Phot
219. he application software screen However the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine Emulation Description Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers Value PCL6 KPDL KPDL Auto KPDL Error Report When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode set whether or not the error report is output Value Off On Color Setting You can choose whether status reports are printed in color or black and white Value Color Black amp White EcoPrint Override A4 Letter EcoPrint conserves toner when printing This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a problem Value Off On Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter which are similar in size as the same size when printing Value Off A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size On A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size The machine will use whichever size is in the paper source Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode Value 1 sided 2 sided Bind LongEdge 2 sided Bind ShortEdge Copies Set the default number of copies from 1 to 999 Value 1 to 999 copies Orientation Set the default orientation Portrait or Landscape Value Portrait Landscape Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Wide A4 Description Turn this to on to increase t
220. he check box 6 15 sending gt Specifying Destination Destination Search Ready to send 10 10 Address Book All DA EI Searches by destination name Vi 001 Sales departinent 1 0123456 e Cem m Advanced search by type of registered destination E _ Sales departmen abc m a mail Folder SMB FTP FAX or Group 003 Support department 0234567 am __ 004 Support department BOX up LLL e GB0426 00 Displays details for individual destinations You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No Search key You can also press Menu to perform a more detailed search 10 10 SSS Saaz 10 10 Ready to send Address Book All IY EQ Vi 001 I Sales department 1 0123456 e Narrow Down 002 Sales department 1 abc ap Search Name 1 1 _ 003 Support department 0234567 p Search No 004 Support department BO cu Sort Name X NN GB0426 00 GB0396 00 n Narrow Down Advanced search by type of registered destination E mail Folder SMB FTP FAX or Group Use V or AN to scroll up and down Search Name and Search No Searches by destination name or address number Sort Name and Sort No Sorts the list by destination name or address number NOTE You may choose multiple destinations To cancel a selection press the corresponding checkbox to clear the check mark 3 Accept the
221. he job will be canceled When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses P Error Message Paper is left Checkpoints Corrective Actions Remove paper from the document finisher Reference Page Paper jam Print overrun 10 17 If a paper jam occurs the machine will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the touch panel Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed paper Warning Low printer memory The job was paused Press Continue to re start the job Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages R Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page RAM disk error An error has occurred on the RAM disk 9 23 Job is canceled Press End The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 01 The amount of data that can be saved at once has been exceeded Restart the system or turn the power OFF ON If the error still occurs divide the file into smaller files 04 Insufficient space on the RAM disk Increase the RAM disk size by changing RAM Disk Setting in the system menu NOTE The range of RAM disk size can be increased by selecting Printer Priority in Optional Memory Removable memory error Is writing to a removable An error occurred in the removable memory prohibited memory The job stopped Press End The
222. he maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for an A4 page 78 characters at 10 pitch and Letter size page 80 characters at 10 pitch This setting is only effective in PCL 6 emulation Value Off On Form Feed TimeOut Receiving print data from the computer the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed When the preset timeout passes the machine automatically prints paper The options are between 5 and 495 seconds Value 5 to 495 seconds LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code character code OAH Value LF Only LF and CR Ignore LF CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code character code ODH Value CR Only LF and CR Ignore CR Paper Feed Mode While printing from the computer select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are specified Value Auto Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type Fixed Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source Gloss Mode Gloss Mode increases the effect of glossiness in printing by reducing the printing speed by half Value Off On IMPORTANT Gloss Mode is not available when Labels and Transparency is selected as the paper type setting Refer to Cassette MP Tray Settings on page 9 8 Depending on the paper used prin
223. he paper turn it over and 3 2 in good condition reload it Is the paper curled folded or wrinkled Replace the paper with new paper 3 2 Are there any loose scraps or jammed Remove any jammed paper 10 23 paper in the machine Printouts are wrinkled Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper 3 2 If you experience frequent problems 2 4 turn the cassette heater switch on Change the orientation in which the 1 15 paper is positioned 3 3 3 7 Cannot print Is the machine plugged in Plug the power cord into an AC outlet Is the machine powered on Turn on the main power switch Are the printer cable and network cable connected Connect the correct printer cable and network cable securely Was the machine powered on before the printer cable was connected Power on the machine after connecting the printer cable Is the print job paused 10 9 Resume printing Troubleshooting gt Solving Malfunctions Symptom Documents are printed improperly Checkpoints Are the application software settings at the PC set properly Corrective Actions Check that the printer driver and application software settings are set properly Reference Page Cannot print with USB Is the USB host blocked Select Unblock in the USB host 9 22 memory settings cre ulcullelsAue siscc cle 422 Check that the USB memory is securely
224. he source code and you are permitted to copy redistribute and modify it under the terms of GPL LGPL For further information including availability of the source code visit http www kyoceramita com gpl Open SSL License Copyright c 1998 2006 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 1 9 Preface gt Legal and Safety Information 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project
225. hen the optional fax kit is installed Applying Restriction Off No restriction given Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one page increments up to 9 999 999 pages Reject Usage Restriction is applied For details on the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction refer to Apply Limit on page 9 73 N 9 67 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 1 Select the item to limit Total selected for Copier Printer Count 10 10 10 10 Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 Print Total Off Print Full Color Off Cancel lt Back Save Scan Others Off FAX Transmission Off Wd GB0480 00 GB0480 01 Use V or A to scroll up and down Individual selected for Copier Printer Count System Menu Counter 10 10 10 10 Account Name Section 01 Printer Total Account ID 00000001 Printer Full Color Copy Total Of Scan Others f Copy Full Color Off FAX Transmission Cancel Cancel GB0480_02 GB0480 03 Use V or A to scroll up and down 2 Select a restriction method 10 10 Counter Limit 1 1 Reject Usage a NN a If Counter Limit is selected press or numeric keys to select the number of pages and press OK GB0474_00 9 68 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Counting the Number of Pages Printed This count
226. her setting to register 2 Display the screen Select the function 10 10 e Favorites oes Paper Saving Copy m to PC Addre e e m m rece to E E mail s to E E mail A ss Book ddress Entry ddress Book inal GB0056 00 Add Edit GB0779 00 3 14 Common Operations gt Favorites 3 Select the job type e LES E gt GB0763 00 GB0764 00 When select the wizard mode 10 10 10 10 Address Book a 1 Ext Address Book gt File Format PDF Lal Original Size Auto 1 2 One Touch Key gt ag Original Orientation Top Edge on Top iL 1 Address Entry E mail A E Use V or AN to scroll up and down LJ Mixed Size Originals gt Kv pagi Leri gt Leri Select the function Checked items will be shown as part of the wizard NOTE When the job type is Copy the Destination Recall Method screen will not be displayed GB0767_00 GB0769_00 4 Enter a name Input 1 Limit32 ETUNEU Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N GB0057 80 5 Check the settings Check the settings and change or add information as needed Name Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Name Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi mc i 1j Input B Limit 32 Number Auto Owner Admin Pe OA EEA PE
227. how to add a new account The following entries are required Account Name Enter the account name up to 32 characters Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits between 0 and 99999999 Restriction This Prohibits printing scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 67 NOTE Any account ID that has already registered cannot be used Enter any other account ID 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 60 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter i C 2 2 Accounting List AN DeTauIT 5etung gt 1 1 y e ceo N e a GB0461_01 e Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Enter the account information Account Name Input 8 1 Limit 32 N e N lo e eo a o Account ID 10 10 0 99999999 Z 00000001 GB0479_00 el 9 63 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 3 Check the settings Check the settings and change or add information as needed Account Name 10 10 Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 Print Total Off Print Full Color Off E N Account ID System Menu Counter 10 10 Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 1 2 Print Total Off Print Full Color Off e Restrictions System Menu Counter 10 10 Account Name Sec
228. i Purpose Tray A6 R 105 x 148 mm B6 R 128 x 182 mm Cassette or Multi Purpose Tray A3 297 x 420 mm B4 257 x 364 mm Hagaki 100x148mm A4 297 x 210 mm Oufukuhagaki 148 x 200 mm A4 R 210 x 297 mm Executive 7 1 4 x10 1 2 B5 257 x 182 mm Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm B5 R 182 x 257 mm Envelope C5 162 x 229mm A5 R 148 x 210 mm Envelope C4 229 x 324mm Folio 210 x 330 mm ISO B5 176 x 250 mm Ledger Envelope 10 Commercial 10 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Legal Envelope 9 Commercial 9 3 7 8 x 8 7 8 Letter Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 3 5 8 x 6 1 2 Letter R Envelope Monarch 3 7 8 x7 1 2 Statement R Youkei 2 114 x 162 mm Officio II Youkei 4 105 x 235 mm 216 x 340 mm Size Entry 98 x 148 to 297 x 432 mm Smoothness 8K 273 x 394 mm 16K 273 x 197 mm 16K R 197 x 273 mm The paper surface should be smooth but it must be uncoated With paper that is too smooth and slippery several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once causing jams Basis Weight In countries that use the metric system basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in area In the United States basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream 500 sheets of paper cut to the standard size or trade size for a specific grade of paper Paper that is too heavy or too light may be sup
229. ia type you wish to change press Paper weight and select the weight Light Normal 1 Normal2 Normal 3 Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3 Extra Weight g m 60 g m to 75 g m 76 g m to 90 g m 91 g m to 105 g m 106 g m to 128 g m 129 g m to 163 g m 164 g m and more Heavy Transpar encies Plain Y Y Y default Y N N N N Transparency N N N N ve Y Y Y default Rough Y Y Y default Y Y Y N Vellum Y default lt Y Y N N N N Labels Y lt Y Y default Y Recycled Y default N Preprinted Y default N Bond Y default Y Cardstock N Y default Color Prepunched Y default Y default Letterhead Y default Envelope Thick z z lt lt lt z lt lt lt z z lt lt lt x z lt lt N N z z lt lt lt z lt x lt Y default Y default Coated Y E Y default High Quality Custom 1 8 The media type cannot be selected for the cassettes Y Available N Not available Y default Y default lt N Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu For Custom 1 8 settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed Custom 1 8 Description Select the sett
230. ich you wish to cancel printing and select Cancel from the Document menu 3 29 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Using Various Functions This section describes common functionality that can be configured for copying sending and the document box 1 Display the screen Copy Press the key of each function When using USB memory plug it into the USB memory slot A1 Press Yes on the displayed screen When printing from USB memory select the file to be printed and press Print When storing a document to USB memory select the folder where the file will be stored and press Menu and then Store File For details refer to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB N Memory on page 7 2 or Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB on page 7 5 NOTE If the touch panel is turned off press the Energy Saver key or the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up 2 Select the functions GB0001 01 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 _ Paper Selection u xxu ooo ee un Z Copies 1 M Density Auto Normal 0 he Duplex ww g 1 sided 1 sided a Collate Offset Collate Y Favorites Select the functions to use Press Functions to display all the functions Refer to Common Functionality on page 3 31 3 30 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Com
231. icio Il Select from 8K 16K Hagaki or Oufukuhagaki Relationship between Original Size Sending Size and Zoom Original Size page 3 32 Sending Size and Zoom page 3 56 are related to each other Refer to the following table Original Size and the size you wish to the same different send as are Original Size Specify as necessary Specify as necessary Sending Size Select Same as Original Select the required size Zoom Select 100 or Auto Select Auto NOTE When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size and select the Zoom 100 you can send the image as the actual size No Zoom 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 end E s OF Check 2 sided Book Original Recall e 1 sided Ae zi Sending Size FX Same as Original Size 2 6 One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book T mele an i 133 2 Off 1 s No V gj Scan Resolution E mail Folder FAX dpi 300x300dpi NN l MM9 m i Close Add Edi Shortcut GB0055 00 GBO0081 01 Use VV or to scroll up and down 2 Select the sending size Same as Original Size 10 10 Metric Inch GB0071 00 d 6 37 sending gt Sending Functions Metric inch or Others Ready to send 1
232. ies may also be stapled For further details refer to the document finisher Operation Guide FAX Kit By installing the FAX kit fax send receive is enabled Also it is possible to use it as a network fax by using it with a computer For further details refer to Fax Kit Operation Guide Expansion Memory To expand the printer memory for more complex print jobs and faster print speed you can plug in optional memory module dual in line memory module in the memory slot provided on the main controller board You can select additional memory module from 256 512 or 1024 MB The maximum memory size is 2048 MB Precautions for Handling the Memory Module L Correct Incorrect To protect electronic parts discharge static electricity from your body by touching a water pipe faucet or other large metal object before handling the memory module Or wear an antistatic wrist strap if possible when you install the memory module Installing the Memory Module 4 Power off Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cable 11 3 Appendix gt Optional Equipment 2 Remove the covers E gt o E i 2225 Te 3 Install the memory module 7 1 Remove the memory module from its package 2 With the memory connection terminal pointing toward the socket align the cut out part with the socket terminal and insert directly in at an angle Q IMPORTANT Before inser
233. iginal eject table may cause the new originals to jam 1 Adjust the original table size 3 8 Common Operations gt Loading Originals 2 Load Originals WA Put the side to be scanned or the first side of two sided originals face up Slide the leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go NOTE Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator Exceeding the maximum level may cause the originals to jam see the figure NN Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals If there is a gap readjust the original width guides The gap may cause the originals to jam Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way that the holes or perforations will be scanned last not first Original Loaded Indicator The original loaded indicator lits depending on how originals are placed Wn Indications and their status are as follows Green left indicator lit Original is placed properly 3 9 Common Operations gt Checking the Equipment s Serial Number Checking the Equipment s Serial Number The equipment s serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure XXX XXXXXXXXX MFP MFP AC120V 60Hz 12A AC220 240V 50 60Hz 7 2A MANUFACTURED NOTE You ll need the equipment s serial number when contacting your Service Representative Please check the number before contacting your Service Representative 3 1
234. ilable when selecting On for IPv6 Value IP Address Manual numbers 128 bit in total separated by colons Prefix Length O to 128 Default Gateway HHETHHLTHHETHHE NOTE Default Gateway is displayed when selecting Off for RA Stateless RA Stateless Select whether or not to use RA Stateless The RA Stateless settings are available when selecting On for IPv6 When selecting On IP Address 1 to 5 appears under IP Address Stateless Prefix Length Value Off On Select whether or not to use the DHCP IPv6 server The DHCP IPv6 Settings are available when selecting On for IPv6 Value Off On A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Item oetup Registration and User Management System Menu Description Protocol Detail The table below lists the network related function settings The network related functions are available when TCP IP is On NetBEUI Selects whether or not to receive documents using NetBEUI Value Off On LPD Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as the network protocol Value Off On SMTP E mail TX Select whether or not to send e mail using SMTP Value Off On POP3 E mail RX Select whether or not to receive e mail using POPS Value Off On FTP Client Transmission Select whether or not to send documents using FTP When selecting On
235. imit page 9 73 Count by Paper Size page 9 74 Unknown ID Job page 9 75 Printer page 9 16 Emulation page 9 16 Color Setting page 9 16 EcoPrint page 9 16 Override A4 Letter page 9 16 Duplex page 9 16 Copies page 9 16 Orientation page 9 16 Wide A4 page 9 17 Form Feed TimeOut page 9 17 LF Action page 9 17 CR Action page 9 77 Paper Feed Mode page 9 17 Gloss Mode page 9 17 XVIII System page 9 78 Network page 9 78 Host Name page 9 78 TCP IP page 9 18 TCP IP page 9 18 IPv4 Settings page 9 78 IPv6 Settings page 9 19 Protocol Detail page 9 20 Netware page 9 21 AppleTalk page 9 21 WSD Scan page 9 21 WSD Print page 9 21 Enhanced WSD page 9 21 Enhanced WSD SSL page 9 21 IPSec page 9 22 Secure Protocol page SSL page 9 22 9 22 IPP Security page 9 22 HTTP Security page 9 22 LDAP Security Ext Address Book page 9 22 LDAP Security User Property page 9 22 LAN Interface page 9 22 Interface Block Setting page 9 22 USB Host page 9 22 USB Device page 9 22 Optional Interface 1 page 9 22 Optional Interface 2 page 9 22 Security Level page 9 4 Restart page 9 4 RAM Disk Setting page 9 23 Main Memory page 9 23 Optional Memory page 9
236. inals 3 7 Original Auto Detect 9 10 Original Size 3 32 Original Size 3 32 Original Size Indicator Plates 2 2 Original SSLeay License 1 10 Original Table 2 3 Original Width Guides 2 3 P Paper Appropriate Paper 11 11 Before Loading 3 2 Cassette 9 8 Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 8 13 Custom Paper Size 9 10 Default Paper Source 9 10 Loading Envelopes 3 6 Loading in the Cassettes 3 3 Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 3 5 Media for Auto 9 10 Media Type Setting 9 10 Multi Purpose Tray 9 8 oetup 9 10 oize and Media 9 8 opecial Paper 11 14 Special Paper Action 9 11 opecifications 11 11 Paper Feeder double cassette 11 3 Paper Feeder single cassette 11 3 Paper Feed Mode 9 17 Paper Length Guide 2 3 Paper Output 3 42 9 13 Paper Selection 3 41 Paper Width Guide 2 3 Part Names 2 2 PDF A 11 25 Platen 2 2 POP3 11 25 POP3 E mail RX Protocol Detail 9 20 PostScript 11 25 Power Cable Connecting 2 11 Power Off 2 12 Power On 2 12 PPM 11 25 Precautions for Use 1 3 Preparing Cables 2 9 Prevent Bleed through 3 55 Printer Driver 11 25 Installing 2 14 Index 3 Printer Settings Color Setting 9 16 Copies 9 16 CR Action 9 17 Duplex 9 16 EcoPrint 9 16 Emulation 9 16 Form Feed TimeOut 9 17 Gloss Mode 9 17 LF Action 9 17 Orientation 9 16 Override A4 Letter 9 16 Paper Feed Mode 9 17 Wide A4 9 17 Printing 5 1 Printing Speed 11 20 Priority Override 3 63 Q Quick Setup Wizard 3 26 R RA Stateless 11 25 Setup 9 19
237. indicated by an additional letter R in order to indicate the orientation of the original paper Placement direction Indicated size Vertical A4 B5 A5 Letter direction Statement Original For the originals paper dimension A is longer than B Horizontal B A4 R B5 R A5 R direction Letter R Statement R Original For the originals paper dimension A is shorter than B The size of the original paper that can be used depends on the function and source tray For further details refer to the page detailing that function or source tray Icons on the Touch Panel The following icons are used to indicate originals and paper placement directions on the touch panel Placement Originals direction Vertical direction Horizontal direction Preface gt About this Operation Guide 1 16 2 Preparation before Use This chapter explains the following topics ximo 2 2 Micedy qem mQ 2 2 STAIN INO aaa c c 2 6 TOUGH seca MENTITUS 2 7 Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables cccccccccseececseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeesaueeseeesseeeseaees 2 8 Conneccion ANIC cass L 2 8 Preparing Necessary Cables siiasmnsssaiedispecsracaadortumntunsansaasannantsiasnneluniuesandontnnusraatwhsesaiewietaunccunaunapa
238. information such as address numbers and user IDs by number Cancels or pauses the printing job in progress Finalizes numeric key entry and finalizes screen during setting of functions Operates linked with the on screen OK Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations Preparation before Use gt Part Names Touch Panel Displays the status of the Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Displays the time and number of Copies j MEM SS M cones 3 _ Paper Zoom Density SZZ Selection ENTIS Displays available functions EC Duplex Combine am COllate LJ o gt gt offset B i sided 1 sided Off Collate a T Shortcut 1 Shortcut 2 NT HH ju Configures more advanced function Displays Favorites settings Displays shortcuts Displays the status of the Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 equipment as well as necessary operation messages gt Original Size ad Auto Original Orientation Displays available functions and m Scrolls up and down when the list of Mixed Size Originals settings Off values cannot be displayed in its Y Mad Inner tray Return to the previous screen DET Registers functions as shortcuts e g eU GB0002 00 2 Preparation before Use gt Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Determining the Connection Method and Prepar
239. ing Cables Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network and prepare the necessary cables for your environment Connection Example Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network cable 1000BASE T 100BASE TX or 10BASE T COMMAND CENTER Network settings Scanner Network Send E mail default settings User and Sends the image data of scanned destination registration Originals to the desired recipient as a file attached to an E mail C message Administrator s PC gt 6 18 Printing Send SMB Saves the scanned image as a data file on your PC 6 19 Network FAX Puen Send FTP Network Network Sends the scanned image as a data file on the FTP gt 6 19 FAX Option A Network TWAIN Scanning WIA Scanning TWAIN and WIA are standardized interface for communication between software applications and image acquisition devices Network Preparation before Use gt Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Preparing Necessary Cables Prepare the necessary cables according to the interface you use Connection Environment Function Connect a LAN cable to the machine Printer Scanner Scanner TWAIN WIA Connect a USB cable to the machine Printer Necessary Cable LAN 10Base T 100Base TX or 1000BASE T Shielded USB2 0 compatible cable Hi Speed USB
240. ing for duplex Value Prohibit Permit Function Defaults Item Change names for Custom 1 8 Names should be not more than 16 characters Selecting media type at multi purpose tray the name after change will be displayed Description File Format Select the default type of the files to be sent Value PDF TIFF JPEG XPS Original Orientation Set the original orientation defaults Value Top Edge Top Top Edge Left Collate Offset Set the defaults for Collate Offset Value Off Collate Only Offset Each Page Offset Each Set File Separation Select the default file separation setting Value Off Each Page Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution Value 600x600dpi 400x400dpi Ultra Fine 300x300dpi 200x400dpi Super Fine 200x200dpi Fine 200x100dpi Normal Color Selection Copy Select the default copying color mode setting Value Auto Color Full Color Black amp White Color Select Send Store Select the default color mode for scanning documents Value Auto Color Gray Auto Color Color B amp W Full Color Grayscale Black amp White Original Image Set the default original document type Value Text Photo Photo Text Graphic Map Text for OCR Printer Output Background Density Adj Select the default value for background density adjustment Value Off Auto Manual Darker 5 EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default
241. inting is displayed Finishing Error Select alternative actions when finishing stapling or offsetting is not available for the selected paper size or media type Value Ignore The setting is ignored and the job is printed Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed No Staple Error Select what to do when staples run out during printing Value Ignore Printing continues without stapling Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed NOTE This function requires the optional document finisher Stapling Limit Error Select what to do when stapling capacity is exceeded during printing Value Ignore Printing continues without stapling Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed NOTE This function requires the optional document finisher Paper Mismatch Error Select what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the cassette or multi purpose tray Value Ignore The setting is ignored and the job is printed Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed Inserted Paper Mismatch Select what to do when the paper size set for the paper source does not match the paper size that was actually loaded Value Ignore The setting is ignored and the job is printed Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed Color Toner
242. is machine to the TWAIN Driver 1 Display the screen 1 Select Start button of the Windows display All Programs Kyocera and then TWAIN Driver Setting 2 Click Add E Kyocera TWAIN Driver ca x Scanner List Nam Model Ad ES o Ee E About Help 2 Configure TWAIN Driver Kyocera TWAIN Driver na x lt Nam 1 Enter the machine name Model 12 Select this machine from the list Scanner Address wen 9 Enter the machine s IP address or host name When using SSL select the checkbox beside SSL ic i When user login administration is enabled select SE ask the checkbox beside Authentication and enter Satan Login User Name up to 64 characters and administrator Password up to 64 characters Password ETT 2 When job accounting is enabled select the ss 2 checkbox beside Account ID and enter the mo a 4 account ID as many as eight digits Help Cancel NOTE When the machine s IP address is unknown contact Administrator 3 Finish registering amp Kyocera TWAIN Driver V s Scanner List NOTE Click Delete to delete the added machine Click Edit to change names Preparation before Use gt Installing Software Setting WIA Driver Register this machine to the WIA Driver Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 7 NOTE The following is not necessary to register
243. ission is complete Value Off On Error Only Canceled before Print a send result report if the job is canceled before being sent Sending Value Off On Job Finish Notice Setting Attaches sent images to job finish notices Value Do Not Attach Image Attach Image Sending Log History You can send the log history by e mail You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached Refer to Sending the Log History on page 8 7 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu User Property Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of that information For details on User Login refer to User Login Administration on page 9 33 N Description User Name Changes the name shown on the user list Up to 32 characters can be entered Login User Name Displays the login user name that is entered at login Login Password Changes the password that is entered at login Up to 64 characters can be entered Access Level Displays the user s access level Account Name Displays the account to which the user belongs E mail Address Changes the user s e mail address Up to 128 characters can be entered Simple Login When simple login is enabled changes associated settings My Panel Registers settings for individual users Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in Network users are not disp
244. ites al EcoPrint 2 Off sie Hue Adjustment 0 Close Add _01 GB0002 01 Use v or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function 10 10 t FAAJUSUTIOCTIC Average Adjust GB0047 00 Press lt or gt to make the adjustment Copying gt Copying Functions Color Balance Adjust the strength of cyan magenta yellow and black Less Magenta Original More Magenta NOTE This feature is used with full color and auto color copying 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen 2 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Copy Copies l Paper Selection rm Sharpness P A Background Density Adj E Prevent Bleed through Off Close Add Edi Shortcu pan Use V or AN to scroll up and down 73 Duplex Collate LN Offset Collate att 1 sided GB0001_01 GB0002_02 2 Select the function Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 color balance ESSEN ndS GB0059_00 o o oo i o a o Press lt or gt on each side of the color to be adjusted Cyan Magenta Yellow Black to adjust each color el Copying gt Copying Functions Saturation Adjust the color saturation of the image Grayish Original Vivid A A A LI AAAA AAAAAA Results in paler color Results in
245. l 0 h E T i a Umb l ER Background Density Adj T3 Duplex Combine ua Collate l i Offset E Prevent Bleed through Los 4 1 sided 1 sided Off Collate Close Add Edi Shortcut GB0001_01 GB0002_02 Use VV or to scroll up and down 2 Adjust the sharpness Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Blur GB0060 00 Press 3 to 3 Blur Sharpen to adjust the sharpness 3 53 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Background Density Adjust copy sons a Remove dark background from originals such as newspapers This feature is used with full dis color and auto color Background Density Adjust is disabled if Auto Color detects black and white originals Off Do not use this function Auto Adjusts the density automatically based on the original Manual Manually adjust the density 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Background Density Adj Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 EE oes 1j ee Sa cw Color Balance _ Paper OW Zoom all Density Selection LE sd Auto 100 Normal 0 V 9 7 aud ee I7 ie Sharpness 4 P A Background Density Adj Duplex Combine gg Collate ww 41 po Offset
246. layed Group Name When group authorization is enabled displays the name shown in the group list Group ID When group authorization is enabled displays the ID shown in the group list Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Cassette MP Tray Settings Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 to 3 and multi purpose tray Cassette to 3 Paper Size Description Set the paper size to load in Cassette 1 and optional paper feeders Cassette 2 and 3 Value Auto Automatically detect paper size Select Metric or Inch for paper size Metric Select from A3 A4 R A4 A5 R B4 B5 R B5 Folio or 216 x 340 mm inch Select from Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R or Oficio II others Select from 8K 16K R or 16K Q IMPORTANT Specify the paper size as follows for the cassette that you want to use for fax reception Inch models Press Auto and then Inch Metric models Press Auto and then Metric Media Type Multi Purpose Tray Paper Size Set the media type to load in Cassette 1 and optional paper feeders Cassette 2 and 3 Value Plain 105 g m or less Rough Vellum 64 g m or less Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick 106 g m and more High Quality Custom 1 8 NOTE To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 9 11 To change to a media type other than Plain re
247. les SMTP protocol To use E mail this protocol must be enabled SMTP Port Number Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25 SMTP Server Name Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name The maximum length of the SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters If entering the name a DNS server address must also be configured The DNS server address may be entered on the TCP IP General tab SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds Authentication Protocol Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP as the protocol The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000 Authenticate as Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a different account Login User Name When Other is selected for Authenticate the login user name set here will be used for SMTP authentication The maximum length of the login user name is 64 characters 2 24 Preparation before Use gt COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail Login Password Description When Other is selected for Authenticate the password set here will be used for authentication The maximum length of the login password is 64 characters POP before SMTP Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds when you have selected POP before SMTP as the Authentication Protocol Test This will test if the SMTP connection can be
248. lex pum GBO0001 01 GB0002 04 Add Edi Shortcut Use v or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 LN t GB0069 00 3 63 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 3 64 4 Copying This chapter explains the following topics BASIC WDSIAUIONL oa e e e udoeeqoeetapubiaetcaronhaninnc ganic asestonshsannsodsnedees sds senteamaduaunatenecsacttare 4 2 CSO NG FUNGUO ere e 4 4 LOO ae 4 5 B Ure yc 4 8 Song qt 4 12 0 ui gn MR RR n 4 15 PAS AGUS MON e 4 16 Coor BANOE ME RET EE 4 17 vnd e 4 18 PATO MACS TR eziiro pM 4 19 MOUP GODY A P 4 20 4 1 Copying gt Basic Operation Basic Operation 1 Press the Copy key Copy NOTE If the touch panel is turned off press the Energy Saver key or the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up 2 Place the originals For details refer to Loading Originals on page 3 7 e 3 Selecting color mo
249. ls Value 3 Lighter 2 1 0 Normal 1 2 3 Darker Send Box Auto Darkens or lightens overall background density when sending images or storing them in the Document Box Adjustment can be made in 7 levels Value 3 Lighter 2 1 O Normal 1 2 3 Darker Toner Save Level EcoPrint Set the toner saving level when using EcoPrint Copy Lowers or raises the toner saving level during copying Adjustment can be made in 5 levels Value 1 to 5 Printer Lowers or raises the toner saving level during printing Adjustment can be made in 5 levels Value 1 to 5 Auto Color Correction This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether the original is color or black and white during Auto Color Mode Setting a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and white Value 5 B amp W 4 3 2 1 Color Correcting Black Line Correct fine lines streaks caused by contamination which may appear on the image when the document processor is used Value Off No correction performed On Low Correction performed The reproduction of fine lines on the original may become lighter than when using Off On High Select this item if a streak remains after using On Low The reproduction of fine lines on the original may become lighter t
250. margin width Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 N S Cancel OK an 4 E 0 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Margin Left 6mm Back rage Same as Front Page Original Orientation Top Edge on Top oe d Press the text box and use to enter a value GB0039 00 EE um a Specify the margin on the back side 3 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Margin Left 6mm Back Page Same as Front Page Original Orientation Top Edge on Top 1 1 GB0039_00 NOTE Original Orientation is not displayed when printing a document from USB memory Auto 10 10 Manual gt 1 1 GB0041 00 E t 3 46 GB0040 00 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Manual Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color Auto L R 18 18 T B 18 18 10 10 L__ 4 0 1 1 ui rx 1 M l d Press the text box and use to enter a value GB0041 00 4 Select the original orientation Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color A Top Edge on Top Margin Left 6mm E Top Edge on Left Safne as Front Page 1 1 Original Orientation Top Edge on Top GB0039 00 NOTE Original Orientation is not displayed when printing a document from USB memory 3 47 10 10 e
251. mbers or symbols press ABC to display Symbol GB0057 E13 GB0057 E14 3 Register the characters you entered Input 8 TFE Maney GB0057_E14 Press Next gt The entered characters are registered Appendix gt Paper Paper This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source Cassettes Supported types Plain paper 60 to 256 g m Supported paper sizes Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Oficio Il A3 A4 R A4 A5 R B4 B5 R B5 Folio 216 x 340 mm 8K 16K R 16K No of sheets Recycled paper 60 to 256 g m Multi Purpose tray Supported types Plain paper 60 to 256 g m Recycled paper 60 to 256 g m Colored paper 60 to 256 g m Supported paper sizes Letter R Letter Statement R Executive A4 R A4 A5 R A6 R B5 R B5 B6 R Folio 16K R 16K Other sizes Portrait 3 7 8 to 11 5 8 or 98 to 297 mm Landscape 5 7 8 to 17 or 148 to 432 mm 500 80 g m No of sheets 100 80 g m Plain paper 60 to 256 g m Recycled paper 60 to 256 g m Colored paper 60 to 256 g m Ledger Legal Oficio Il A3 B4 216 x 340 mm 8K 25 80 g m Postcards Postcards 100 x 148 mm Oufukuhagaki return postcard Return postcard 148 x 200 mm Envelopes Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6
252. ment box is full and no further storage is available Job is canceled Press End Try to perform the job again after printing or deleting data from the Document box When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses C Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Cannot connect to Authentication Set machine time to match the server s 9 23 Server time Check the domain name 9 33 Check the host name 9 33 Check the connection status with the Server 10 13 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Cannot duplex print on the following paper Did you select a paper size media type that cannot be duplex printed Press Paper Selection to select the available paper Press Continue to print without using Duplex function 4 8 Cannot offset the following paper Did you select a paper size media type that cannot be offset Press Paper Selection to select the available paper Press Continue to print without using Offset function 3 43 Cannot print the specified number of copies Only one copy is available due to processing too many jobs in parallel Press Continue to continue printing Press Cancel to cancel the job Cannot process this job This job is canceled because
253. menu select Control Panel System and Security and Allow a program through Windows Firewall Control Panel Home Y Action Center E P e System and Security Review your computer s status and resolve issues Ei Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer problems Restore your computer to an earlier time Network and Internet H H n Hardware and Sound d Windows Firewa i Check firewall status Allow a program through Windows Firewall Programs User Accounts and Family k System Safety View amount of RAM and processor speed Checkthe Windows Experience Index Appearance and Allow remote access Seethe name of this computer Device Manager Personalization amp Windows Update Clock Language and Region Turn automatic updating on or off Check for updates View installed updates C S NOTE If the User Account Control dialog box appears click the Continue button 2 r Windows Firewall Allowed Programs Search Control Panel P Allow programs to communicate through Windows Firewall To add change or remove allowed programs and ports click Change settings What are the risks of allowing a program to communicate Allowed programs and features Name Home Work Private Public O BranchCache Content Retrieval Uses HTTP O BranchCache Hosted Cache Client Uses HTTPS O BranchCache Hosted Cache Server Uses HTTPS O Branc
254. min A5 R 10 sheets min 10 sheets min 13 sheets min 13 sheets min First Print Time A4 feed from Cassette Full color 13 6 seconds or less Black and White 11 7 seconds or less Zoom Level Manual mode 25 to 40095 196 increments Auto mode Preset Zoom Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets Resolution 600x600 dpi Supported Original Types Sheet Book 3 dimensional objects maximum original size Ledger A3 Original Feed System Fixed 11 19 Appendix gt Specifications Printer functions Description 20 ppm model 25 ppm model Printing Speed Full color Black and White Full color Black and White Letter A4 20 sheets min 20 sheets min 25 sheets min 25 sheets min Letter R A4 R 14 sheets min 14 sheets min 17 sheets min 17 sheets min Ledger A3 10 sheets min 10 sheets min 13 sheets min 13 sheets min Legal B4 10 sheets min 10 sheets min 13 sheets min 13 sheets min B5 20 sheets min 20 sheets min 25 sheets min 25 sheets min B5 R 14 sheets min 14 sheets min 17 sheets min 17 sheets min A5 R 10 sheets min 10 sheets min 13 sheets min 13 sheets min First Print Time A4 feed from Cassette Full color 14 0 seconds or less Black and White 11 0 seconds or less Full color 12 0 seconds or less Black and White 10 0 seconds or less
255. mon Functionality Functionality related to originals What do you want to do Specify the original size Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction Reference Page Original Size gt page 3 32 Original Orientation gt page 3 34 Scan mixed size originals Mixed Size Originals page 3 35 Automatically scan 2 sided originals 2 sided Book Original gt page 3 37 Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job Functionality related to document quality What do you want to do Specify the paper size and type Continuous Scan page 3 39 Reference Page Paper Selection gt page 3 41 Change the paper output Paper Output P page 3 42 Collate the output documents in page order Offset the output documents by set Collate Offset gt page 3 43 Add margins white space Margin gt page 3 45 Staple in the output documents Staple gt page 3 48 Adjust the density Density gt page 3 50 Set the resolution at which to scan originals Scan Resolution gt page 3 51 Select original image type for best results Original Image page 3 52 Emphasize the outline of texts or lines Blur the image outline Sharpness 5 page 3 53 Darken or lighten the background i e the area with no text or images of originals Background Density Adjust gt page 3 54 Prevent bleed through for 2 sided o
256. n Displays the processing ee Displays the current Press Next gt to follow method the instructions step JAM 0501 Jr Puts the current step on hold Returns to the Advances to the next previous step step Jam Location Indicators Detailed paper jam positions are as follows Refer to the indicated page number to remove the paper jam Paper Jam Message Reference Page Clear the paper jammed in the multi purpose tray 10 24 Clear the paper jammed in right cover 1 Clear the paper jammed in cassette 1 Clear the paper jammed in cassette 2 2 3 4 Clear the paper jammed in right cover 3 5 6 Clear the paper jammed in cassette 3 7 Clear the paper jammed in the finisher 10 26 Clear the staple jammed in the finisher Clear the paper jammed in the bridge unit Clear the paper jammed in the document processor Precautions with Paper Jams Do not reuse jammed papers e Ifthe paper tears during removal be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming e Discard paper that has jammed in the optional document finisher A page affected by a paper jam will be printed again A Caution The fixing unit is extremely hot Take sufficient care when working in this area as there is a danger of getting burned 10 23 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Multi Purpose Tray
257. n and User Management gt User Login Administration Simple Login The simple login function allows users to log in simply by selecting a user name Users must be registered in advance to use this functionality For details refer to Adding a User on page 9 37 X Simple Login Settings Enable simple login 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 34 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Local Authentication Local User List 1 1 Simple login settings gt Off Local User Authorization GB0435 00 2 Enable simple login 10 10 Simple Login m e m e Off Simple Login Setup GB0711 00 t GB0710 00 Register a User Register users to use simple login Up to 20 users can be registered The table below explains the user information to be registered Name Set the user name to display on the Simple Login screen User Select which registered users can use simple login Password Login Set whether to require entry of a login password at login Icon Select the icon to display on the Simple Login screen 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 34 display the screen 9 46 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration N System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 2 Simple Login User Login GBO710_01 A Local Auth
258. n image Select the destination using either of the following methods e Choosing from the Address Book page 6 15 e Choosing by One Touch Key page 6 17 e Entering a New E mail Address page 6 18 e Specifying a New PC Folder page 6 19 NOTE When the optional fax kit has been installed you can specify the fax destination Enter the other party s number using the numeric keypad Choosing from the Address Book Select a destination registered in the Address Book NOTE For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book refer to Registering Destinations in the Address Book on page 6 24 For details on the External Address Book refer to KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send 10 10 Dest 0 Recall Check One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book nen 1J2 M es E mail Folder GB0055 00 2 Select the destination Ready to send Address Book All Iva i Sales department 1 0123456 fod Sales department 1 abc oy am 10 10 Use V or A to scroll up and down 1 1 Jot 4 Support department 0234567 Jo 1 Get Support department BOX el GB0426_00 Press the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list The selected destinations are indicated by a checkmark in t
259. n page 3 59 N Black amp White 4 Specifying destination Ready to send 10 10 Select the destination to which to send an image SS For details refer to Specifying Destination on page 6 15 One Touch Key Address Book E mail Folder j s Functions pd Favorites GB0055 00 Sending gt Basic Operation 5 Selecting the functions Ready to send 10 10 S Press Functions to display the sending functions to use o Quem Check For details refer to Sending Functions on page 6 36 E Address Book Ext Address Book V E mail Folder FAX One Touch Key MM MM lt GB0055_00 6 Start sending Start Press the Start key to start sending 6 4 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your computer Screens of Windows 7 are used in the following explanation The details of the screens will vary in other versions of Windows NOTE Log on to Windows with administrator privileges Checking What to Enter for Host Name Check the name of the destination computer 4 Display the window From the Start menu select Computer and then System Properties In Windows XP right click My Computer and select Pro
260. nd 50 numbers for groups If you set 000 as the address number the address is registered under the lowest available number 6 Enter the destination Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Select the item that you want to change E mail Address GB0078 02 GB0078 03 Use v or A to scroll up and down Select the type of destination to register For details on FAX refer to FAX Operation Guide N E mail Address Input 11 1 Limit 128 Del e kis N lo e eo a o Enter the E mail address Up to 128 characters can be entered 6 25 sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N The Folder SMB Address 1 Enter Host Name Path Port Login User Name and Login Password Ready to send 10 10 Input 3 Limit64 Host Name Login User Name Cancel GB0705 02 GB0057 15 Can OK I Use V or A to scroll up and down For more information refer to Specifying a New PC Folder on page 6 19 X 2 Confirm the connection status Ready to send 10 10 I 10 10 Path Port Login User Name 1 GB0705_03 GB0696 00 Connected appears when connection to the destination is correctly established If Cannot connect appears review the entry Ready to send 10 10 Host Name Path Port Login User Name Cancel GB0705
261. nter This counts the number of pages printed or scanned 3 11 User Property Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of 9 7 that information Cassette MP Tray Settings Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 to 3 and multi purpose 9 8 tray Common Settings Configures overall machine operation 9 9 Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start up default screen 9 9 Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations 9 9 Original Settings Configures settings for originals 9 9 Paper Settings Configures settings for paper 9 10 Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm up is completed 9 12 or the Reset key is pressed Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending Setting the frequently used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier Q IMPORTANT If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately move to the function screen and press the Reset key Paper Output Select output tray respectively for copy jobs print jobs from Custom 9 13 Box computers and FAX RX data Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time 9 13 Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred 9 14 Color Toner Empty Action Select whether printing is prohibited or the Print in Black and White 9 14 setting is used for printing once the color toner runs out Measurement Select inch or m
262. nterrupt key The machine resumes the paused print jobs 4 20 5 Printing This chapter explains the following topics aiununepiTs sisse db 5 2 Printing Data Saved on the Printer ccccccccccseeccceseeeceeseecsseeceeeecseueeeseaeecsueeecsueeeesaueeesueesssaueeessuseesseneeesanees 5 6 PEVAR INT c Hm 5 6 FOOT eA FOR aegre a E EE EEE Y 5 8 Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents cccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeesaeeeessaeeeeseeeees 5 11 5 1 Printing gt Printing from Applications Printing from Applications This section provides basic instructions for printing documents Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 7 You can print documents created on your computer once you install the printer driver from the included DVD Product Library Refer to Installing Software on page 2 14 N For more information about how to configure advanced printer driver settings and print documents refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on the DVD 4 Display the window r Adobe Reader Edit View Document Tools Window Help Open aO ix ied Ej Find x Create Adobe PDF Using Acrobat com i Collaborate Save a Copy Shift Ctrl S Save as Text Attach to Email
263. ny Adobe Acrobat Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell Inc BM and IBM PC AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U S A and or other countries e AppleTalk Bonjour Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc Helvetica Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH ITC Avant Garde Gothic ITC Bookman ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation e UFST MicroType fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc are installed in this machine This machine contains the NF module developed by ACCESS Co Ltd This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group e ThinPrint is a trademark of ThinPrint GmbH in Germany and other countries All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks designations and will not be used in this Operation Guide GPL LGPL This product contains GPL http www gnu org licenses gpl html and or LGPL http www gnu org licenses lgpl html software as part of its firmware You can get t
264. o 3 52 pattern dots grouped together in patterns and not aligned uniformly 10 8 Troubleshooting gt Solving Malfunctions Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Printouts are not clear Did you choose appropriate image Select appropriate image quality 3 52 quality for the original Dirt on the print side of the Is the platen or the document Clean the platen or the document 10 6 paper processor dirty processor Run Laser Scanner Cleaning 9 26 Printouts are fuzzy Is the machine being used in very Use in an environment that has 1 3 humid conditions suitable humidity If you experience frequent problems 2 4 turn the cassette heater switch on Run Drum Refresh 9 26 Images are skewed Are the originals placed correctly When placing originals on the platen 3 7 align them with the original size indicator plates When placing originals in the 3 8 document processor align the original width guides securely before placing the originals Is the paper loaded correctly Check the position of the paper width 3 2 guides Perform center line adjustment For more information about how to do so contact your service representative Paper often jams Is the paper loaded correctly Load the paper correctly 3 2 Change the orientation in which the 1 15 paper is positioned 2 5 3 7 Is the paper of the supported type Is it Remove t
265. o elapse until the auto sleep function is activated is set with the S eep Timer 9 23 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Item Description Sleep Level Detailed settings Select the Sleep level Set the Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption even more than normal Sleep mode Value Quick Recovery Energy Saver NOTE If the optional Gigabit Ethernet Board is installed Energy Saver cannot be specified Set whether to use the Energy Saver mode for the following functions individually Network USB Cable Card Reader RAM Disk FAX Value Off On NOTE When the machine enters Energy Saver the data stored in the RAM disk will be deleted In addition the machine does not wake from sleep mode when it receives print data from a PC connected by USB cable Also the ID card cannot be recognized Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during processing processing stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user In the Auto Error Clear mode automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses For details refer to Responding to Error Messages on page 10 13 Value Off On Low Power Timer Set amount of time before entering the Low Power mode Value 1 to 240 minutes 1 minute increments Panel Reset Timer If you select On for Auto Panel Reset set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset Value 5 to 495 seconds every five seconds NOTE
266. omputer or related device on the network The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots e g 192 168 110 171 Each number should be between 0 and 255 IPP IPP Internet Printing Protocol is a standard that uses TCP IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be sent between remote computers and printers IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations It also supports the HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption KPDL Kyocera Page Description Language Kyocera s PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3 11 24 Appendix gt Glossary Multi Purpose MP Tray The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto envelopes Hagaki transparencies or labels NetBEUI NetBIOS Extended User Interface An interface developed by IBM in 1985 as an update from NetBIOS It enables more advanced functions on smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP IP etc It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS 2 and Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services NetWare Novell s network management so
267. on Print Resolution XPS Fit to Page Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function Value Off On Detail Settings Image Quality Set the default value for the image quality adjustment range when selecting the file format with which to send and store images Value 1 Low High Comp 2 3 4 5 High Low Comp Set the default value for PDF A when selecting the file format with which to send and store images Value Off PDF A 1a PDF A 1b f you want to enable the changed defaults immediately move to the function screen and press the Reset key Paper Output Description Paper Output Select output tray respectively for copy jobs print jobs from Job Box computers and FAX RX data Value Inner Tray Finisher Tray Job Separator Tray NOTE If the optional document finisher has been installed Inner Tray will change to Finisher Tray f you want to enable the changed defaults immediately move to the function screen and press the Reset key Preset Limit Item Description Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time Value 1 to 999 copies Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Error Handling Item Description Duplexing Error Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type Value 1 sided Printed in 1 sided Display Error Error message to cancel pr
268. on page 6 22 6 18 sending gt Specifying Destination Specifying a New PC Folder Specify either the desired shared folder on a computer or an FTP server as the destination NOTE Refer to Creating a Shared Folder on page 6 7 for details on how to share a folder Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the COMMAND CENTER is On For details refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send 10 10 Wants 0 One Touch Key r v Recall j Check E mail Book Address Ext Address Book E Folder 2 Select the folder type 10 10 vy Favorites GB0055 00 SMB Path Entry FTP Path Entry el GB0103_00 3 Enter the destination information Inputd Limit64 Enter the next information Once you have entered one item press Next to advance to the next item For send to folder SMB Data to be entered Max characters Host Name Host name or IP address of the PC to receive Up to 64 characters the data Path Path to the receiving folder such as follows Up to 128 characters For example User ScanData 6 19 sending gt Specifying Destination Data to be entered Max characters Login User Name User name to access the PC Up to 64 characters Domain name User name For example abcdnet ames smith User name Domain name For example j
269. on the original Scan to USB 1 sided 5 Set when using a 1 sided sheet original 2 sided Set when using a 2 sided sheet original that will be bound on the left or right Book Set when using a book original such as a magazine or book that is bound on the left Other 2 sided 1 sided Set when using a 1 sided sheet original Settings Book l Original 2 sided Binding Left Set when using a 2 sided sheet original that will be bound on the left or Right right Set when using a 2 sided sheet original that will be bound at the top Set when using a book original such as a magazine or book that is bound on the left WIN i Set when using a book original such as a magazine or book that is bound on the right Original Orientation 4 Display the screen Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction This function is displayed when 2 sided Binding Left Right or 2 sided Binding Top is selected 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Send Ready to send 10 10 Recall TEC to send 10 10 Dest 0 One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book M 2 Book Check dns sided Book Origina dns AN cx Sending Size HX Same as Original Size Ss Ww E mail Folder j FAX Ta File Separation
270. one 010 None 011 None 012 None GB0095_00 Cancel E O Destinations can be changed later Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6 22 N sending gt Specifying Destination Entering a New E mail Address Enter the desired e mail address NOTE Access the COMMAND CENTER beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e mail For details refer to COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail on page 2 23 1 3 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send 10 10 Dest 0 Recall o Reb ees One Touch e Address Book Ext Address Book a NENNEN _ A Ne E m Folder FAX v Functions Yi Favorites GB0055 00 Enter destination E mail address Input 11 Limit 128 GB0057 07 Up to 128 characters can be entered To enter multiple destinations press Next Destination and enter the next destination Up to 100 E mail addresses can be specified Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters You can register the entered email address in the Address Book by pressing Menu and then Add to Address Book You can also replace the information for a previously registered destination Accept the destinations abc def com Input 11 Limit 128 Destinations can be changed later Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations
271. ons Q IMPORTANT Specifications are subject to change without notice Common functions Item Description 20 ppm model 25 ppm model Printing Method Electrophotographic four color CMYK printing using tandem 4 drum system Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography Paper Weight Cassette 60 to 256 g m Multi Purpose Tray 60 to 256 g m Media Type Cassette Plain Rough Vellum Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Duplex Same as Simplex Multi Purpose Tray Plain Transparency OHP film Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick Envelope Coated High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Paper Size Cassette Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Oficio Il A3 A4 R A4 A5 R B4 B5 R B5 Folio 216 x 340 mm 8K 16K R 16K Multi Purpose Tray Maximum Ledger A3 Minimum Statement R A6 R Paper Capacity Cassette 500 sheets 80 g m Multi Purpose Tray 100 sheets 80 g m Letter A4 or less 25 sheets 80 g m more than Letter A4 Output Tray Inner Tray 250 sheets 80 g m Capacity Job Separator 30 sheets 80 g m Main Memory Standard 1024 MB Maximum 2048 MB Interface Standard USB Interface Connector 1 USB Hi Speed USB memory slot 2 USB Hi Speed Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX 1000 BASE T
272. or right 2 sided Print a 2 sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the top 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7 2 display the screen Ready to print from Box 10 10 ies 1 a _ Paper Collate 2 Selection AD uM gt Offset Collate GB0097 00 2 Select the function Ready to print from Box 2 sided 1 sided 2 sided GB0065 00 Cancel Document Box gt Functions for Document Box Encrypted PDF Password Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7 2 display the screen Ready to print from Box 10 10 Ready to print from Box 10 10 o Cos 73 gno PDF Password Paper m Collate Duplex Collate 1 sided lapi Paper Size b d XPS Fit to Page MP Off Shortcut GB0097 00 GB0099 01 Cancel Use v or AN to scroll up and down Input Q 1 Limit256 GB0057 21 Up to 256 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N Document Box gt Functions for Document Box JPEG TIFF Print Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files Paper Size Fit the image size to the selected paper size Image Resolution Print
273. original sizes auto selection 30 sheets 50 to 80 g m maximum Dimensions W x D x H 23 1 4x19 1 Ax4 7 8 590x489x123 mm Weight Approx 15 4 Ib or less Approx 7 kg or less Paper Feeder single cassette option Description Paper Supply Method Friction Feed No Sheets 500 80 g m 1 cassette Paper Size Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Oficio Il A3 A4 R A4 A5 R B4 B5 R B5 Folio 216 x 340 mm 8K 16K R 16K Supported Paper Paper weight 52 256 g m Media types standard recycled color Dimensions W x D x H 23 1 4x23 3 16x13 7 8 590x589x352 mm Weight Approx 46 Ib Approx 21 kg Paper Feeder double cassette option Description Paper Supply Method Friction Feed No Sheets 500 80 g m7 2 cassette Paper Size Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Oficio Il A3 A4 R A4 A5 R B4 B5 R B5 Folio 216 x 340 mm 8K 16K R 16K Supported Paper Paper weight 52 256 g m Media types standard recycled color Dimensions W x D x H 23 1 4 23 3 16x13 7 8 590x589x352 mm Approx 46 Ib Approx 21 kg 11 21 Appendix gt Specifications Document Finisher option Number of Trays Description 1 tray Paper Size Non stapling Ledger Legal Oficio Il A3 B4 Folio 216 x 340 mm 8K 250 sheets Letter Letter R Executive R Statement R A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R 16K 500 sheets Supported Pa
274. per Weight 52 to 256 g m Stapling 90 g m or less Maximum Sheets for Stapling Ledger Legal Oficio Il A3 B4 216 x 340 mm 8K 25 sheets Letter Letter R A4 A4 R B5 B5 R 16K 50 sheets Paper weight 90 g m or less Dimensions W x D x H 16 3 8x20 1 2x10 7 8 416x521x275 5 mm Weight Approx 26 4 Ib Approx 12 kg Environmental Specifications Recovery time from Low Power Mode Description 10 seconds or less Time to Low Power Mode 3 minutes Recovery time from sleep 23 seconds or less Time to sleep 20 ppm model 20 minutes 25 ppm model 30 minutes Duplexing NOTE Standard Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types EN ISO 7779 Der h chste Schalldruckpegel betr gt 70 dB A oder weniger gem EN ISO 7779 EK1 ITB 2000 Das Gerat ist nicht f r die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen Um st rende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden 11 22 Appendix gt Glossary Glossary AppleTalk AppleTalk which comes with Apple Computer s Mac OS is a network protocol AppleTalk enables file printer sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk network Auto Form Feed Timeout During data transmission the machine may som
275. perties The System Properties dialog box appears Click the Computer Name tab in the window that appears 2 Check the computer name Check the computer name in the window that appears If there is a workgroup Computer name domain and workgroup settings Computer name wits Full computer name PC001 Computer description Workgroup abcdnet W Change settings All characters appearing in Full computer name should be entered in Host Name Example PC001 If there is a domain Computer name domain and workgroup settings Computer name ALL Change settings Full computer name 2 Computer description Domain abcdnet The characters to the left of the first dot in Full computer name should be entered in Host Name Example pc001 After checking the computer name click the E Close button to close the System Properties screen In Windows XP after checking the computer name click the Cancel button to close the System Properties screen 6 5 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Checking What to Enter for Login User Name Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows 1 Display the window From the Start menu select All Programs or Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt The Command Prompt window appears Check the domain name and user name At the Command Prompt enter net config workstation and then press Enter
276. ple abcdnet james smith User name gdomain name for example james smith abcdnet 10 12 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages Responding to Error Messages If the touch panel displays any of these messages follow the corresponding procedure A Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Acceptable staple count Is the acceptable staple count Press Continue to print without exceeded exceeded For details refer to stapling Document Finisher option on Press Cancel to cancel the job page 11 22 Add the following paper in Is the indicated cassette out of Load paper cassette paper Press Paper Selection to select the other paper source Press Continue to print on the paper in the currently selected paper source Add the following paper in the Is the paper of the selected size Load paper multi purpose tray loaded in the multi purpose tray Press Paper Selection to select the other paper source Press Continue to print on the paper in the currently selected paper source Does the paper size set for the Press Continue to continue printing paper source matches the paper Press Cancel to cancel the job size that was actually loaded When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses B Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Box limit exceeded Docu
277. plied incorrectly or cause paper jams which may cause excessive wear of the machine Mixed paper weight i e thickness may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly Thickness Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper jams or with several sheets being supplied at once Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick The proper thickness is between 0 086 and 0 230 mm 11 12 Appendix gt Paper Moisture Content Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage Moisture affects how the paper is supplied the electrostatic changeability of the paper and how the toner adheres Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room High relative humidity causes paper to become damp making the edges expand so it appears wavy Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6 To maintain the right level of moisture content bear in mind the following considerations e Store paper in a cool well ventilated place e Store paper flat and unopened in the package Once the package is opened reseal it if the paper is not to b
278. possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 01 Connect a removable memory that can be written to An error occurred in the removable 2 memory The job stopped Press End The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 01 The amount of data that can be saved at once has been exceeded Restart the system or turn the power OFF ON If the error still occurs the removable memory is not compatible with the machine Use the removable memory formatted by this machine If the removable memory cannot be formatted it is damaged Connect a compatible removable memory Removable Memory is full Job is canceled Press End Insufficient free space in the removable memory Delete unneeded files Remove originals in the Are there any originals left in the Remove originals from the document document processor document processor processor Replace all originals and press Remove originals from the document Continue processor put them back in their original order and place them again Press Continue to resume printing Press Cancel to cancel the job Replace MK Replacement of the parts in the maintenance kit is necessary at every 200 000 pages of printing and requires professional servicing Contact your Service Representative When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time
279. r Windows Me XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices This function replaces what TWAIN used to do the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of operation so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application 11 26 Index Numerics 2 sided Book Original 3 37 A Address Book Adding a Contact 6 24 Adding a Group 6 28 Editing and Deleting 6 31 Adjustment Maintenance Auto Color Correction 9 25 Background Density Adj 9 25 Calibration 9 26 Color Registration 9 25 Correcting Black Line 9 25 Density Adjustment 9 25 Display Brightness 9 25 DP Adjustment 9 26 Drum Refresh 1 9 26 Laser Scanner Cleaning 9 26 Tone Curve Adjustment 9 26 Toner Save Level EcoPrint 9 25 AppleTalk 11 23 Setup 9 21 Applications 11 5 Auto Form Feed Timeout 11 23 Auto Image Rotation 4 19 Auto IP 11 23 Setup 9 18 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function 1 12 Auto Paper Selection 11 23 Auto Sleep 2 21 11 23 B Background Density Adjust 3 54 Bonjour 11 23 Setup 9 18 C Cassette 2 2 Loading Paper 3 3 Paper Size and Media Type 9 8 Character Entry Method 11 7 Checking the Counter 3 11 Cleaning Document Processor 10 6 Glass Platen 10 6 Cleaning Cloth 2 3 Coated Paper 11 17 Collate Offset 3 43 Color Balance 4 17 Color Registration 9 25 Color Selection 3 59 Color Toner Empty Action 9 14 Combine 4 12 2in 1 4 12 4in 1 4 12 Border Line 4 12 COMMAND CENTER 2 23 Connecting LAN Cable 2 1
280. r may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through Before purchasing envelopes in volume try testing a sample to ensure the print quality otoring envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled Thus keep the package sealed until you are ready to use them Keep the following points in mind Donotuse envelopes with exposed adhesive In addition do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is exposed after the top layer is peeled off Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes off in the machine Donotuse envelopes with certain special features For example do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film covered window e f paper jams occur load fewer envelopes at once Thick Paper Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray fan it and align the edges Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams NOTE If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed load the paper in the multi purpose tray with the leading edge raised a few millimeters Colored Paper Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 11 In addition the
281. racters entered Delete Key Press to delete a character to the left of the cursor Space Key Press to insert a space Enter Key Press to enter a line break Cancel Press to cancel entered characters and return to the screen before the entry was made lt Back Press to return to the previous screen OK Next gt Press to save the entered characters and move to the next screen Appendix gt Character Entry Method Upper case Letter Entry Screen AB Input cv Limit 32 EDIDIT Conca lt back Te GB0057 E02 Number Symbol Entry Screen l Input 3 1 23 Limit 32 Symbol BRBDDOBSNEK d i l Le IA SI KTTHEDUBETER GB0057 E03 Display Key Description A V To enter a number or symbol not shown in the keyboard press the cursor key and scroll the screen to view other numbers or symbols to enter Appendix gt Character Entry Method Entering Characters Follow the steps below to enter List A 1 for an example 4 Enter List space uF E Input 1 8 Input pu L Limit 32 B List 8 De 32 un R ROM gob mz ans gt 3pm EET DIS E To shift from lower case to upper case letters press a A To shift from upper case to lower case letters press A a GB0057 E12 GB0057 E11 2 Enter A 1 nan Input vy nput List Ph Limit32 List A 1 pud n W PITEBRELE To enter nu
282. rator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation dpi dots per inch A unit for resolution representing the number of dots printed per inch 25 4 mm EcoPrint Mode A printing mode that helps save toner Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal Enhanced WSD Kyocera s proprietary web services Emulation The function to interpret and execute other printers page description languages The machine emulates operation of PCL6 KPDL and KPDL automatic FTP File Transfer Protocol A protocol to transfer files on the TCP IP network whether the Internet or an intranet Along with HTTP and SMTP POP FTP is now frequently used on the Internet Grayscale A computer color expression Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray varying from black at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest without any other colors Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels that is white and black only for 1 bit 256 gray levels including white and black for 8 bits and 65 536 gray levels for 16 bits Help A Help key is provided on this machine s operation panel If you are unsure of how to operate the machine would like more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly press the Help key to view a detailed explanation on the touch panel IP Address An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific c
283. rator privileges Designations in the group can also be registered in the system menu 1 Display the screen Ready to send 10 10 E Dest Q S 2 C Recall Glock end e a One VEN eS MOTE m Book Ext Address Book 3 O E mail m to send 10 10 1 Address Book All my i Sales department 1 0123456 001 5 Sales department 1 abc Ga j002 c Support department 0234567 Ga 002 co Support department 3 E EEIEM eS d GB0426 01 2 Adds a new destination ERO 0 0 0 10 10 Use V or A to scroll up and down GB0396 01 3 Select the registration method 10 10 1 1 GB0419 01 e sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book 4 Enter the group name Support department Input 18 1 Limit 32 GB0057 16 Up to 32 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N 5 Enter the address number Ready to send 10 10 10 10 Name Support department 1 Address Number Auto Member Member 0 000 250 1 1 o i M GB0217 01 le GB0420_02 e Press or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number 1 250 Address Number is an ID for a destination You can select any available number out of 200 numbers for contacts and 50 numbers for groups If you set 000 as the address number the address is regi
284. rce applied in the machine The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used This composition of labels may cause more problems The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels resulting in a serious failure Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet When using such paper do not peel these margins from the carrier sheet before completing output Allowed Not allowed Top sheet Carrier sheet Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g m Basis weight overall paper weight 104 to 151 g m Top sheet thickness 0 086 to 0 107 mm Overall paper thickness 0 115 to 0 160 mm Moisture content 4 to 6 composite 11 15 Appendix gt Paper Hagaki Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray fan them and align the edges If the Hagaki paper is curled straighten it before loading Printing onto curled Hagaki may cause jams Use unfolded Oufukuhagaki available at post offices Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler Envelopes Use the multi purpose tray for envelopes Due to the structure of envelopes printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases Thin envelopes in particula
285. re using Windows Server 2008 check At tribute Editor tab of user properties If you are using Windows Server 2000 2003 check ADSIEdit ADSIEdit is a support tool in cluded on the installation CD or DVD for Windows Server OS under SUPPORT TOOLS This item is displayed when the optional fax is installed 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 34 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Group Authorization User Login Network Authentication Local User List Simple login settings Group List 2 1 1 GB0450 01 OO System Menu Counter Luis Group Authorization Set gt GB0435 03 1 1 e M N Er e a m oO End 2 Enter the group information Group ID 10 10 1 4294967295 234567800 1 2 Group Name GB0458 00 Input 1 Limit 128 GB0057 33 9 53 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Access Level Administrator 10 10 User el 3 Check the settings Check the settings and change or add information as needed Group ID System Menu Counter Group ID 1234567890 Group Name Group d 10 10 Access Level Administrator Printer Off Group Name System Menu Counter Group ID 1234567890 1 Save 10 10 Group Name Group 01 Access Level Administrator Printer Off
286. riginal image type for best results Original Image page 3 52 Emphasize the outline of texts or lines Blur the image outline Sharpness 5 page 3 53 Darken or lighten the background i e the area with no text or images of originals Background Density Adjust gt page 3 54 Prevent bleed through for 2 sided originals Prevent Bleed through gt page 3 55 Enlarge or shrink originals according to the sending size Zoom page 3 56 Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job Continuous Scan gt page 3 39 Add a file name to the job to easily check its status File Name Entry gt page 3 62 Add an E mail subject and body when sending E mail E mail Subject Body page 6 40 Send notice by e mail when a job is complete Job Finish Notice page 3 60 Encrypt your message FTP Encrypted TX gt page 6 41 Send a image to a WSD compatible computer NOTE WSD Scan P page 6 42 This section does not include fax settings For details on fax operation refer to the FAX Operation Guide Fax functionality requires the optional fax kit 6 36 sending gt Sending Functions Sending Size Select size of image to be sent Same as Original Size Automatically sends the same size as the original Metric Select from A3 A4 A5 A5 R B4 B5 B6 Folio or 216 x 340 mm Select from Ledger Letter Legal Statement 11 x 15 or Of
287. riginals Prevent Bleed through gt page 3 55 Enlarge or shrink originals according to the sending or storing size Zoom page 3 56 Select the file format for images being sent or stored File Format gt page 3 57 Change the color mode Color Selection gt page 3 59 Send notice by e mail when a job is complete Job Finish Notice page 3 60 Add a file name to the job to easily check its status File Name Entry gt page 3 62 Suspend the current job and override it to give a new job top priority 3 31 Priority Override page 3 63 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Original Size 00683 USB Specify the original size to be scanned Auto Automatically detects the size of the original Metric Select from A3 A4 R A4 A5 R A5 A6 R B4 B5 R B5 B6 R B6 Folio or 216 x 340 mm inch Select from Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Statement 11 x 15 or Oficio Il Others Select from 8K 16K R 16K Hagaki Oufukuhagaki or Custom Size Entry Enter the size Inch models Horizontal 2 to 17 in 0 01 increments Vertical 2 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models Horizontal 50 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Vertical 50 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments For instructions on how to specify the custom original size refer to Custom Original Size on page 9 9 NOTE Be sure to always specify the original size when
288. rinter Sending Describes the functions you can use when sending originals Document Box Provides a basic guide to using document boxes Status Job Cancel Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel fax transmission Setup Registration and User Explains system menu functionality related to overall machine operation job Management accounting and user management Troubleshooting Explains how to respond to error indications such as when the machine runs out of toner and problems such as paper jams Appendix Explains how to enter characters and lists the machine specifications Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine Provides information on media types and paper sizes Also includes a glossary of terms Conventions in This Guide The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description Convention Description Example Bold Indicates the operation panel keys or a computer screen Press the Start key Regular Indicates the touch panel keys Press OK Italic Indicates a message displayed on the touch panel Ready to copy is displayed Used to emphasize a key word phrase or references to additional For more information information refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 21 Indicates
289. rinter driver installation procedure Follow the on screen instructions to restart the system if required The TWAIN driver and WIA driver can be installed if the machine and computer are connected via a network You can install the WIA driver using Custom Mode 2 15 Preparation before Use gt Installing Software If you are installing the TWAIN driver or WIA driver continue by configuring the TWAIN driver 2 18 or WIA driver 2 19 Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh The machine s printer functionality can be used by a Macintosh computer NOTE When printing from a Macintosh computer set the machine s emulation to KPDL or KPDL Auto For details about the configuration method refer to Printer on page 9 16 If connecting by Bonjour enable Bonjour in the machine s network settings For details refer to Network on page 9 18 In the Authenticate screen enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system 1 Insert the DVD Double click the Kyocera icon Display the screen eoo t Kyocera E eoo 4 OS X 10 5 or higher r3 L lt gt Elne o Q Lal EE m m o Q DEVICES o A DEVICES SHARED SEARCH FOR Common files Double click Double click X 6 items Zero KB available pym 74 X 2 items Zero KB available 7 Double click either OS X 10 2 and 10 3 Only OS X 10 4 Only or OS X 10 5 or higher depending on your Mac
290. rmation Status of job Storing Data n Pausing the job or error Canceling the job F The status before starting to save such as during scanning originals Close Closes the Store Job Status screen Scheduled Job screen Status Job Cancel 10 10 0014 i 1233 GB0185 00 Display Key Details Icons that indicate the job type B Sending Job FAX Menu Pressing this key displays Start Now Select the job you wish to send immediately and then press Menu followed by Start Now Cancel Select the job you want to cancel from the list and press this key s Press for the job for which you wish to display detailed information Status of job Sending Waiting Close Closes the Scheduled Job screen Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job History Checking Job History Check the history of completed jobs Available Job History Screens The job histories are displayed separately in three screens Printing Jobs Sending Jobs and Storing Jobs The following job histories are available Print Job Log Copy Send Job Log FAX Printer Folder SMB FTP FAX reception E mail E mail reception Application Printing from Document Box Mixed Multiple destination pop REpOrULISI Store Job Log Scan Printing data from removable FAX memory Printer 1 Display the screen 10 10 Status Job Cancel ES 02 les Job Log Pso
291. rocedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area DANGER EE rene LASER ATTENZIONE eae eee a WAARSCHUWING NIET ZICHTBARE BEES AT mA 3B NRI A Ate ae KLASSE 3B LASERSTRAAL INDIEN GEOPEND HATERA HOCS ARES AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO VERMIJD DIRECTE BLOOTSTELLING Be ERABE RARER ATTENTION CLASE 3B RAYONNEMENT PRECAUCION CLASSE 3B RADIACIONE AAN DE STRAAL SME LE ASCKIR SHER RICH LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS D OUVERTURE LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABR a TUE RITU coe EET E eet a EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO DUCVTCEBY MT tt lhe AB n uus uM aoas VORSICHT KLASSE 3B UNSICHTBARE PERIGO RADIA O DE LASERINVISIVEL m c LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG CLASSE 3B QUANDOABERTOEVITAR usnyyeHve Kn acca 3B V3beraite Ei CC EBICC72A3BA BID 8 JX GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN EXPOSICAODIRETA NO FEIXE npamoro nonagaHus nasepHOoro nyya CF E AEBERCD filiu c AL The label shown below is attached on the right side of the machine CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT Preface gt Notice SAFETY OF LASER BEAM USA 1 Safety of laser beam This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards established by the U S DHHS Departmen
292. rposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging Under the terms of this License Agreement you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging Monotype Imaging retains all rights title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces except that you may make one backup copy You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces unless sooner terminated This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty 30 days after notice from Monotype Imaging When this License expires or is terminated you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefac
293. rrected through normal registration However if it is not resolved or to perform more detailed settings use the detailed settings NOTE To perform color registration verify that either Letter or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette Q IMPORTANT Before performing color registration be sure to perform Calibration see page 9 26 If color drift remains perform color registration By performing color registration without performing Calibration the color drift will be resolved once however it may cause the serious color drift later Normal Registration 4 Display the screen Use VV or AN to scroll up and down System Menu Counter T gt System Menu Counter Bjiememewmanemne 0000000000 d System Menu Counter 10 10 1 Correcting Black Line GB0054 04 Display Brightness Color Registration lone Curvesacuusimen System Menu Counter GB0629 01 GB0641 00 2 Print the chart 10 10 Print Chart Registration GB0642 00 A chart is printed On the chart for each of M magenta C cyan and Y yellow 3 chart types are printed on one sheet H F left V vertical H R right 9 27 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Chart Example Color Registration Correction Chart I G EC A 1 3 5 y 9 HFODBO2 468 iG E C A13 579 HFODBO2 4 6 8 ill TM DIU ll orn onowr PaRauyu Oo O5 NOU UM m Q E
294. s E mail GB0055 00 4 Scan the originals Procedure using this machine Ready to send 10 10 From Computer GB0648 00 2 Select the destination computer 10 10 Reload Cancel GB0649 00 Updates the list Displays information for individual destination computers 3 Press the Start key Start sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated 6 43 GB0055 01 Sending gt WSD Scan Procedure from Your Computer Ready to send From Computer 10 10 From Operation Panel gt 1 1 2 Use the software installed on the computer to send the images GB0648_00 6 44 Sending gt Scanning using TWAIN Scanning using TWAIN This section explains how to scan an original using TWAIN The procedure for scanning using the TWAIN driver is explained as an example The WIA driver is used in the same way 1 Display the window 1 Activate the TWAIN compatible application 2 Select the machine using the application and display the TWAIN dialog box NOTE For selecting the machine see the Operation Guide or Help for each application software 2 Configure the function Select scanning settings in the TWAIN dialog box that opens Original Configurations Original Size Image Quality Settings Color Settings A4 Black and Whit
295. s f Folder Options m Sen Folder views You can apply the view such as Details or Icons that you are using for this folder to all folders of this type oply to Folders Reset Folders Advanced settings Launch folder windows in a separate process Restore previous folder windows at logon V Show drive letters V Show encrypted or compressed NTFS files in color iV Show pop up description for folder and desktop items V Show preview handlers in preview pane 2 Use Sharing Wizard Recommended Automatically type into the Search Box Select the typed item in the view Restore Defaults 3 E LS A Remove the checkmark from Use Sharing Wizard Recommended in Advanced settings In Windows XP click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Simple File Sharing Recommended in Advanced settings 4 Create a folder 1 Create a folder on the local disk C For example create a folder with the name scannerdata on the local disk C 2 Right click the scannerdata folder and click Share and Advanced sharing Click the Advanced Sharing button In Windows XP right click the scannerdata folder and select Sharing and Security or Sharing sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 2 Configures permission settings 1 E Advanced Sharing V Share this folder 1 Settings Share name scannerdata Limit the num
296. s can be printed as an accounting report Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered Copier Printer Count Format When Total is selected for Copier Print Total Total number of pages used for copying and printing Printer Count Total number of pages used for full color copying and printing Total number of pages used for black and white copying and printing When Individual is selected for Copier Total number of pages used for copying Printer Count Total number of pages used for full color copying Total number of pages used for black and white copying Total number of pages used for printing Total number of pages used for full color printing Total number of pages used for black and white printing Shared statistics Total number of pages scanned Total number of pages scanned for copying Total number of pages faxed Total number of other pages scanned Total number of pages received Total number of pages sent Total duration of fax transmissions Total number of duplex pages printed Total number of 1 sided pages printed Total number of combine 2 in 1 pages Total number of combine 4 in 1 pages Total number of non combine pages printed For count by paper size page counts will be printed by paper size under Paper Count 4 Prepare paper Check that Letter or A4 paper is loaded in the cassette
297. s one job Continuous Scan gt page 3 39 Automatically rotate the scanned image to match the paper orientation Auto Image Rotation gt page 4 19 Send notice by e mail when a job is complete Add a file name to the job to easily check its status Job Finish Notice page 3 60 File Name Entry gt page 3 62 Suspend the current job and override it to give a new job top priority Priority Override page 3 63 Pause the current jobs and make copies immediately Interrupt Copy gt page 4 20 Copying gt Copying Functions Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image Auto A3 141 Adjusts the image to match the paper size Standard Zoom Adjusts the image to match present sizes Inch Models Zoom Level Original Copy Auto 400 Max 200 STMT gt gt Ledger 154 STMT gt gt Legal 129 Letter gt gt Ledger 121 Legal gt gt Ledger 100 78 Legal gt gt Letter 77 Ledger gt gt Legal 64 Ledger gt gt Letter 50 Ledger gt gt STMT 25 Min Metric Models Zoom Level Original Copy Auto 400 Max 200 A5 gt gt A3 141 A4 gt gt A3 A5 gt gt A4 127 Folio gt gt A3 106 11x15 gt gt A3 100 90 Folio gt gt A4 75 11x15 gt gt A4 70 A3 gt gt A4 A4 gt gt A5 50 25 Min Metric Models Asia Pacific Auto 400 Max 200 A5 gt gt A3 141 A4
298. s that are compatible with your MFP before you purchase one Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine Overview of the Applications The applications listed below are installed on this machine You can use these applications for a limited period on a trial basis UG 33 ThinPrint This application can only be activated in Europe This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver NOTE Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the application Starting Application Use Use the procedure below to start using an application NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 9 37 for the default login user name and password 4 Display the screen Use v or AN to scroll up and down 10510 lt gt System Menu Counter User Login Job Accounting oN z Printer 2 4 5 1 NN i L Date Timer Vv System Menu Counter 10 10 3 Optional Function GB0054 03 GB0511 01 11 5 Appendix gt Optional Equipment 2 Start using an application 1 Select the desired application and press Activate 10 10 IC CARD AUTHENTI GB0557 00 N Displays d
299. s the number of pages printed Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time Types of the counts are as follows Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed and the total number of pages used You can also use by Paper Size by Duplex and by Combine to check the number of pages used e For copying you can check the pages used for black and white and full color copying as well as the total pages used For printing you can check the pages used for black and white and full color printing as well as the total pages used You can use by Paper Size to check the number of pages used in the paper size set in Count by Paper Size on page 9 74 as well as the number of pages used in other paper sizes You can use by Duplex to check the number of pages used in Duplex 1 sided mode Duplex 2 sided mode and the total for both You can use by Combine to check the number of pages used in Combine None mode Combine 2 in 1 mode Combine 4 in 1 mode and the total for all three Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying faxing and other functions as well as the total number of pages scanned FAX Transmission Pages Displays the number of pages faxed FAX Transmission Time Displays the total duration of fax transmissions This item is di
300. saved settings configuration 3 Place the originals ae sd e NNNNN D 1 ADS lt lt For details refer to Loading Originals on page 3 7 N 4 Scan the originals Click the Scan button The document data is scanned 6 46 7 Document Box This chapter explains the following topics Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory sss nennen nennen nnns 7 2 Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB sssssssssssssssssseee nee nnne nnne nnne 7 5 Removing USB MaMy T T 7 8 F uncuons TOF Document BOX NN TEE 7 9 Bol seas 7 10 Encrypted PDF PassWord c 7 11 duc addi E eeeee 7 12 DO IC OP AOC ses 7 13 SONG AE c I 7 14 1 1 Document Box gt Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB memory without having to use a computer The following file types can be printed e PDF file Version 1 5 e TIFF file TIFF V6 TTN2 format e J
301. set the FTP Port Number Use the FTP default port 21 Value Off On Port 1 65535 FTP Server Reception Select whether or not to receive documents using FTP Value Off On SMB Client Transmission Select whether or not to send documents using SMB When selecting On set the SMB default Port Number Use the SMB default port 139 For Windows Vista use 445 Value Off On Port 1 65535 LDAP Select whether or not to use LDAP Value Off On SNMP Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP Value Off On SNMPv3 Select whether or not to communicate using SNMPv3 Value Off On HTTP Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP Value Off On HTTPS Select whether or not to communicate using HTTPS SSL must be set to On in SSL on page 9 22 Value Off On IPP Select whether or not to communicate using IPP When selecting On set the IPP default Port Number Use the IPP default port 631 Value Off On Port 1 65535 IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL When selecting On set the IPP over SSL default Port Number Use the IPP over SSL default port 443 SSL must be set to On in SSL on page 9 22 Value Off On Port 1 65535 Raw Port Select whether or not to receive documents using Raw Port Value Off On ThinPrint Select whether or not to use ThinPrint Value Off On ThinPrintOverSSL Select
302. sh to register the shortcut NOTE If you select a shortcut number already registered the currently registered shortcut can be replaced with a new one 3 22 Common Operations gt Shortcuts 4 Select the function 10 10 Paper Selection Cancel lt Back Select the function screen to display with the shortcut 5 Enter the shortcut name Input 10 1 Limit24 GB0057 04 Up to 24 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters A 6 Register the shortcut Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Number Shortcut 1 Name Shortcut 1 GB0793 00 Cancel Confirm the settings and press Save 3 23 Common Operations gt Shortcuts Editing and Deleting Shortcuts Change shortcut number name or delete shortcut 1 Display the screen Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 7 See Copies 1 a u n Hemd g Original Size Paper Zoom M Density Auto wx Selection Al 5 Original Orientation Auto 100 Normal 0 Top Edge on Top a un m gt Mixed Size Originals Duplex ps Combine aw COllate 4 Offset Paper Output 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off Collate GB0001 04 GB0002 00 Add Edit Shortcut Press Functions on the Copy Send or Document Box screen and then Add Edit Shortcut 2 Edit or
303. simple login Input B j i 1 Limit 32 GB0057 32 3 Check the settings Check the settings and change or add information as needed Name System Menu Counter 10 10 Input Limit 32 User User A Password Login off Icon Male 1 el GB0645_00 GB0057_62 Cancel 9 48 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration User System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Local User gt e Password Login 2 Icon Male 1 am E GB0645 00 GB0740 00 el Select the user to use for simple logins from Local User or Network User Password Login System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 off User On 1 1 Password Login 2 Icon S S lo oO Cancel 9 4 Brem J o o Icon System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 p pm 1 g Male 2 2 Ji 1 Female 2 E 1 User A Password Login Off 1 Basket mr Piano Guitar Icon Male 1 EN Car Bicycle l l Cancel cancel lt Back ave GB0645_00 GB0828 00 Use VV or AN to scroll up and down 4 Register the user 10 10 Password Login Off Icon Male 1 eru 3 Save L e GB0645_00 Cancel Editing and Deleting Users User properties can be changed and users can be deleted 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 34 display the s
304. sing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications Choosing the Appropriate Paper This section describes guidelines for choosing paper Condition Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled dirty or torn Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper fiber lint or that is especially delicate Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine Choose paper with a smooth and even surface however avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit Ingredient Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon These paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80 pulp i e not more than 20 of the total paper content consists of cotton or other fibers 11 11 Appendix gt Paper Supported Paper Sizes Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine Measurements in the table take into account a 0 7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width Corner angles must be 90 0 2 Mult
305. spanol Italiano Nederlands Pyccxuu Portugu s Report Print reports to check the machine settings and status Default settings for printing the result reports can also be configured Report Print Item Description Status Page Prints the status page allowing you to check the information including current settings available memory space and optional equipment installed Status Page MFP Firmware Version Font List Prints the font list allowing you to check the font samples installed in the machine Scalable Bitmap Selection FSET Network Status Prints the network status allowing you to check the information including network interface firmware version network address and protocol Network Status Page MFP Firmware Version Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Description Service Status Prints the service status More detailed information is available than on the Status Page Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose Accounting Report Prints the accounting report allowing you to check the accounts that have been registered on the machine ACCOUNT REPORT MFP Firmware Version Result Report Settings Description Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete E mail Folder Automatically print a report of transmission result when E mail or SMB FTP transm
306. splayed when the optional fax kit is installed 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 60 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 Job Accounting On Print Accounting Report Total Job Accounting Each Job Accounting GB0461 02 To count the number of pages for all account select Total Job Accounting To count the number of pages by account select Each Job Accounting Searches by account name System Menu Counter 10 10 Q e 1 1 d Allows you to search for an account name and sorts results TA Others GB0469_00 To count the number of pages by account name press for the account name whose usage you wish to view 9 69 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 2 View the number of pages System Menu Counter 10 10 Printed Pages Scanned Pages FAX TX Pages D FAX TX Time 0 00 00 Counter f End j Reset e GB0463_00 To reset the counter System Menu Counter 10 10 Printed Pages Scanned Pages 1 1 D FAX TX Pages Reset GB0463 00 9 70 System Menu Counter 10 10 Copy B amp W p Copy Full Color 222 Copy Total 333 Printer B amp W ESEI GB0464_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Printing an Accounting Report Total pages counted at all relevant account
307. ss the text box displaying the numbers and use or the numeric keypad to enter a value GB0025 00 3 33 GB0026 00 GB0029 00 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction To use any of the following functions the document s original orientation must be set e Duplex e Margin e Combine e Staple option When placing originals on the platen Top Edge on Top Top Edge on Left 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Original Orientation Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 WES m un cum p 75 Original Size E Z lll uet Auto Paper OR oom sS ensity w E Selection 3 Original Orientation Auto 100 Normal 0 Top Edge on Top ur ee fe O 1 F pp RM gt Mixed Size Originals Duplex Combine an Collate Off la j v Offset Paper Output 1 sided gt 1 sided Off Collate Inner tray j Favorites Close Add Edit Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0001 01 GB0002 00 2 Select the function Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 L Top Edge on Top Top Edge on Left GB0036_00 TEN L e Select the original orien
308. stered under the lowest available number 6 Select the members destinations 1 Display the screen Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send aoan 2 Name Support department Address Number Auto 1 gt 1 1 Member Member 0 e 2 Press the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list The selected destinations are indicated by a checkmark in the check box Ready to send 10 10 Address Book Contact Iva V 001 fim Sales departrient 1 0123456 e GB0420 02 GB0114 03 Searches by destination name Advanced search by type of registered destination E ET mail Folder SMB FTP or FAX m 001 Sales department 1 abc a Y 002 Support department 0234567 Qa 002 E Support department BOX am ve Use VM or AN to scroll up and down Displays details for individual destinations GB0428 01 You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No Search key 6 29 sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book You can also press Menu to perform a more detailed search 10 10 uU 10 10 Address Book Contact Iva V 001 fim Sales department 1 0123456 Narrow Down _ 001 Sales department 1 abc am search Name WA 002 B Support department 0234567 Qa Search No 002 i Support department BOX Ga VY Sort Name GB0396 00 1 5 Oo o S A t GB
309. stination page 9 16 Color TIFF Compression page 9 16 Default Screen page 9 16 Document Box Sub Address Box refer to Fax Operation Guide Job Box page 5 6 Quick Copy Job Retention page 5 8 Deletion of Job Retention page 5 11 Polling Box refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX refer to Fax Operation Guide Address Book One Touch Address Book page 6 24 One Touch Key page 6 33 Address Book Defaults Sort Print List refer to Fax Operation Guide XVII User Login Job Accounting User Login Settings User Login page 9 35 page 9 33 Local User List page 9 37 Simple login settings page 9 46 Simple Login page 9 46 Simple Login Setup page 9 46 Group Authorization Set page 9 52 Local User Authorization page 9 47 Group Authorization page 9 52 Group List page 9 52 Obtain NW User Property page 9 56 Job Accounting Job Accounting page 9 67 Settings page 9 58 Print Accounting Report page 9 77 Total Job Accounting page 9 69 Printed Pages page 9 69 Scanned Pages page 9 69 FAX TX Pages page 9 69 FAX TX Time page 9 69 Counter Reset page 9 69 Each Job Accounting page 9 69 Accounting List page 9 63 Default Setting page 9 73 Apply Limit page 9 73 Copier Printer Count page 9 73 Default Counter L
310. successfully established E mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E mail that can be sent in kilobytes When the value is 0 no maximum size is set Sender Address Enter the E mail address of the person responsible for the machine such as the machine administrator so that a reply or non delivery report will go to a person rather than to the machine The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication The maximum length of the sender address is 128 characters Signature Enter the signature The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of the E mail body It is often used for further identification of the machine The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters Domain Restriction 3 Click Submit Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected The maximum length of the domain name is 32 characters You can also specify E mail addresses 2 25 Preparation before Use gt COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail 2 26 3 Common Operations This chapter explains the following topics LO AGING AIDCM Em omm 3 2 Belgro Loading Paper sete csciersemteasedatte neue 3 2 Loading Paper in the CaSSCUCS ccavesnsarcsnecaeansvarkvannedanienuduatuveadaannoniaeweianuetadeiabuevacieadeeedautdanielsaaacsnaieem 3 3 Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ssesssssssssssesereeeneen nnnm nnne nnne nnne nnn nnne nnns 3 5 POAC C
311. such as ventilation may cause the machine to respond more slowly Auto Sleep Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time in the Low Power Mode The default preset time is 20 minutes for the 20 ppm model and 30 minutes for the 25 ppm model For more information about configuring settings refer to Sleep Timer on page 9 24 N Energy Saver This mode reduces power consumption even more than normal Sleep mode and allows Sleep Mode to be set separately for each function Printing from a computer connected with a USB cable is not available while the machine is asleep To use the machine press the Power key The time required for the machine to wake up from power save mode and resume normal operation will be longer than for normal Sleep Mode NOTE If the optional Gigabit Ethernet Board is installed Energy Saver cannot be specified For more information on Energy Saver Mode settings refer to Sleep Level on page 9 24 N 2 21 Preparation before Use gt Machine Setup Wizard Machine Setup Wizard The Machine Setup Wizard is launched when the equipment is turned on for the first time after being installed System Menu Counter 10 10 Welcome This wizard will help you set up your machine To continue press Next gt Following the instructions on the screen to configure the following settings GB0889 00 Date Time settings Time Zone Summer Time
312. supplemental information or operations for reference NOTE IMPORTANT Indicates items that are required or prohibited so as to avoid problems IMPORTANT Caution Indicates what must be observed to prevent injury or machine breakdown and how to deal with it A Caution Preface gt About this Operation Guide Job types for which each function can be set are shown with icons Description Description This function can be set while copying a This function can be set while printing from USB document memory Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 10 10 Copies 1 Copies _ Paper il Density ETE gg Collate Duplex Selection z 12 Selection _ 559 Offset Auto Normal 0 A4 D Cola 1 ded ip eal n C Duplex i Collate Ls LA Offset sided i sided Collate m Screen Print Screen GB0001 01 GB0097 00 This function can be set while sending a This function can be set while saving a file to USB document memory 10 10 Dest 0 0 Reb O Check a ee t File 2 sided Scan 5 Format Book Resolution PDF One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book l M M n Em E dl Hl Density l File Name uz ab S enr doc E E mail Folder FAX Normal 0 e Functions Cancel Send S
313. t of Health and Human Services in 1968 This indicates that the product is safe to use during normal operation and maintenance The laser optical system enclosed in a protective housing and sealed within the external covers never permits the laser beam to escape 2 The CDRH Act A laser product related act was implemented on Aug 2 1976 by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration FDA This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U S without certification and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug 1 1976 The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States On this machine the label is on the right 3 Optical unit When checking the optical unit avoid direct exposure to the laser beam which is invisible Shown at below is the label located on the cover of the optical unit DANGER CLASS3BINVISIBLE LASER ATTENZIONE CLASSE 3B RADIAZIONE WAARSCHUWING NIET ZICHTBARE Ei 7220 9BAE RR LAGER FART RSAROCRS iij mW AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO DUE CU DN T BETS S EE ATTENTION CLASE 3B RAYONNEMENT PRECAUCION CLASSE 3B RADIACIONE AAN DE STRAAL pa A Gadbm ies nae A LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS D OUVERTURE LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE _______ _ fa Pee nga RRA EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU _EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO BH
314. t of time of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened For more information refer to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2 20 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function This device includes 2 sided copying as a standard function For example by copying two 1 sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2 sided copy it is possible to lower the amount of paper used For more information refer to Duplex on page 4 8 Paper Recycling This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types Energy Star ENERGY STAR Program We have determined as a company participating in ENERGY STAR that this product has earned the ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR Preface gt About this Operation Guide About this Operation Guide This Operation Guide contains the following chapters Chapter Contents Preface Includes information about operating precautions trademarks and this manual Preparation before Use Provides information about part names connecting cables and setting up and configuring the machine Common Operations Explains overall machine operation including loading paper and originals and logging in and out Copying Describes the functions you can use when copying Printing Provides information about functionality that is available when using the machine as a p
315. tation 3 34 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Mixed Size Originals o oo USB scans all sheets in the document processor even if they are of different sizes 1 Supported Combinations of Originals e B4and B5 B5 Ledger and Letter R A4R Letter R NOTE When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination Folio and A4 R make sure to set Original Auto Detect to On for Folio For more information refer to Original Auto Detect on page 9 10 Up to 30 sheets can be placed in the document processor for mixed size originals Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Mixed Size Originals Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Copies 1 comm o EM ee Paper m Zoom al Density Z Selection ARMS Auto 100 Normal 0 uud ee I Duplex Combine an COllate DE Offset 1 sided 1 sided Off Collate Inner tray GB0001 01 GB0002 00 Add Edit Shortcut inns Use V or AN to scroll up and down 3 35 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 2 Select the function Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 e 3 36 GB0035_00 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 2 sided Book Original Select the type and orientation of the binding based
316. ted section includes safety warnings Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol N General warning N Warning of high temperature The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol G Warning of prohibited action Q Disassembly prohibited The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol o Alert of required action Z Remove the power plug from the outlet Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing fee required NOTE An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function 1 2 Preface gt Notice Environment The service environmental conditions are as follows Temperature 50 to 90 5 F 10 to 32 5 C e Humidity 15 to 80 96 However adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality It is recommended to use the machine at a temperature around 60 8 to 80 6 F or less 16 to 27 C humidity around 36 to 65 In addi
317. that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception Q IMPORTANT Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity 2 13 Preparation before Use gt Installing Software Installing Software Install appropriate software on your PC from the included Product Library DVD Product Library if you want to use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC NOTE Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep Wake the device from Low Power Mode or Sleep before continuing Refer to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2 20 and Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 21 The optional Fax Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality WIA driver cannot be installed on Windows XP Installing Printer Driver Ensure the machine is plugged in and connected to the PC before installing the printer driver from the DVD Installing Printer Driver in Windows If you are connecting this machine to a Windows PC follow the next steps to install the printer driver The example shows you how to connect your machine to a Windows 7 PC NOTE If the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box displays select Cancel If the autorun screen is displayed click Run Setup exe If the us
318. the Cassettes The standard cassette will each hold plain paper recycled paper or color paper The standard cassette holds up to 500 sheets of plain paper 80 g m The following paper sizes are supported Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Oficio Il A3 B4 A4 A4 R A5 R B5 B5 R Folio 216 x 340 mm 8K 16K R and 16K NOTE You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating Such paper may cause paper jams or other faults For clearer and brighter color copies use the special color paper When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled or colored paper always specify the media type setting Refer to Media Type on page 9 8 The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 256 g m If you are using a paper weight between 106 and 256 g m set the media type to Thick If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag 1 Adjust the cassette size Adjust the cassette size to reflect the size of paper being loaded Paper sizes are marked on the cassette NOTE When using 11 x 17 3 3 Common Operations gt Loading Paper 2 Load paper 1 7 IMPORTANT Load the paper with the print side facing up Before loading the paper be sure that it is not curled or folded Paper that is curled or fol
319. the machine System Configures machine system settings 9 18 Network Configures network settings 9 18 Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with 9 22 external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces Security Level The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work There is no need for customers to use this menu Restart Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the machine Same as the computer restart RAM Disk Setting When optional memory is installed a RAM disk can be created and its 9 23 size can be set Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a Job Box Main Memory Select the memory allocation scheme based on the application in which 9 23 you are using the equipment Optional Memory When optional memory is installed select the memory allocation 9 23 scheme based on the application in which you are using the equipment Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine 11 5 Date Timer Configures settings related to the date and time 9 23 Adjustment Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance 9 25 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Language Description Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel Value English Deutsch Francais E
320. the network In the Computer name text box enter the name of the computer that you checked pc001 and then click Search 2 Click pc001 scannerdata that appears in the search results In Windows XP double click the computer pc001 that appears in the search results 2 Check the folder that appears Network PCOOL r scannerdste gt scannerdata Organize Include in library Share with Burn New folder D dr Name Date modified Type ME Desktop di projectA 3 22 2010 10 37 AM File folder Jj Downloads Ji projectB 3 22 201010 38 AM File folder El Recent Places 1 Check the address bar The third and following text strings f should be entered for the path In Windows XP double click the scannerdata folder and check the address bar The text string to the right of the third backslash Y should be entered in Path Example scannerdata NOTE You can also specify a subfolder in the shared folder as the location where data is to be sent In this case share name name of folder in the shared folder should be entered for the Path In the example window above scannerdata projectA is the Path 6 10 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Configuring Windows Firewall for Windows 7 Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission NOTE Log on to Windows with administrator privileges 1 Check file and printer sharing 1 From the Start
321. thorization Restricts the use of the machine by user Local user authorization must be enabled to use this function see page 9 41 The following restriction items are available Printer Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer Printer Full Color Select whether or not to reject usage of full color print functions for the printer Copy Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions Copy Full Color Select whether or not to reject usage of full color print functions for copies Send Select whether or not to reject usage of send functions other than faxing FAX Transmission Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions Storing in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes Storing in Memory Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory Mandatory at user registration NOTE By default one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored Each user s properties are Machine Administrator User Name DeviceAdmin Login User Name 20 ppm model 2000 25 ppm model 2500 Login Password 20 ppm model 2000 25 ppm model 2500 Access Level Machine Administrator Administrator User Name Admin Login User Name Admin Login Password Admin e Access Level Administrator It is recommended to periodically change the user name login user nam
322. ting a Shared Folder ccccecccsecceeceseeceecceeeseeeececcaeeceeesaeeecaeesseesesesseeeseeeseeees 6 7 Checking the Path MERE EE enc ree ere eee eee ee 6 10 Configuring Windows Firewall for Windows 7 ccccceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeas 6 11 Specifying Destination zuxuxiccicecaseereisetuce ui tane y end gesta pude o pco Phe hadas ceni ro enu p bnt E M mai UE 6 15 Choosing from the Address Book ssesssesssssssssssee nennen nennen nnns 6 15 Choosing by One Touch Key ssssssssssssssseeeeeen nnne nnne nnne nsn nnns 6 17 Entering a New E mail Address eeesesssesseessessee eene nnne nnne nns 6 18 Specifying a New PC Folder 1 seeessesssssseeseeeenene nennen nennen nnn nnns nenas 6 19 Checking and Editing Destinations cece eccccecece cece eeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeseeesaneees 6 22 Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending 6 23 Registering Destinations in the Address Book ccccccceccseeceeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeneeseeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaes 6 24 Adnoga O70 9 2 o ERE U TE 6 24 Ne el gl ic 16 0 m 6 28 Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries ccccccccsecceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneees 6 31 Adding a Destination on One Touch Key ccc ceeccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeee cece eeseeeseeeeseeeseeseeseeesanees 6 33 Adding a
323. ting a memory module in the machine make sure that the machine is switched off 3 Carefully press the inserted memory down and into the machine 4 Reinstall the covers Removing the Memory Module To remove a memory module remove the right cover and the memory slot cover from the machine Then carefully push out the two socket clamps Ease the memory module out of the socket to remove Verifying the Expanded Memory To verify that the memory module is working properly test it by printing a status page Refer to Report on page 9 5 Card Authentication Kit User login administration can be performed using IC cards To do so it is necessary to register IC card information on the previously registered local user list For more information about how to register this information refer to the C Card Authentication Kit Operation Guide Appendix gt Optional Equipment Gigabit Ethernet Board The Gigabit Ethernet Board provides a high speed connection for the Gigabit per second interface Since the kit was designed to work with TCP IP NetWare NetBEUI and AppleTalk protocols in the same way as the main unit it fulfills the network printing demands on Windows Macintosh and UNIX environments This expansion kit is also compatible with ThinPrint USB Keyboard A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on keyboard
324. ting in gloss mode may cause wrinkle in paper To reduce wrinkle try using thicker paper Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu System Configures machine system settings Network Configures network settings Host Name Item Description HostNam Check the host name of the machine TCP IP Description TCP IP Set up TCP IP to connect to the Windows network Value Off On IPv4 Settings Set up TCP IP IPv4 to connect to the network The IPv4 setting is available when selecting On for TCP IP DHCP Select whether or not to use the DHCP IPv4 server Value Off On Bonjour Select whether or not to use Bonjour Value Off On Auto IP Select whether or not to use Auto IP Value Off On IP Address Set the IP addresses Value At THEE TAFE HHH Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet masks Value THHETHEL TAR AA Default Gateway Set the IP gateway addresses Value fHHE HHH HHH HHH A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu IPv6 Settings Description Set up TCP IP IPv6 to connect to the network The IPv6 setting is available when selecting On for TCP IP IPv6 Sets whether to use IPv6 Value Off On Manual Setting Manually specify the IP address prefix length and gateway address of TCP IP IPv6 The manual setting is ava
325. tion Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight e Avoid locations with vibrations Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations e Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air e Avoid poorly ventilated locations If the floor is delicate against casters when this machine is moved after installation the floor material may be damaged During copying some ozone is released but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one s health If however the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies the smell may become unpleasant To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated Precautions for Use Cautions when handling consumables A CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box Dangerous sparks may cause burns Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box avoid inhalation and ingestion as well as contact with your eyes and skin e f you do happen to inhale toner move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water If coughing develops contact a physician e f you do happen to ingest toner rinse your mouth
326. tion 01 Account ID 00000001 Print Total Print Full Color Cancel System Menu Counter Scan Others Off N 4 Register the account System Menu Counter 10 10 Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 Print Total O ff Print Full Color off 9 64 GB0480_00 GB0480_00 GB0480_01 GB0480_00 GB0480 00 Input 8 Limit 32 Canc OK Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters System Menu Counter 0 99999999 00000001 2 3 MEL i System Menu Counter Off Counter Limit Reject Usage 2 Use v or AN to scroll up and down For details refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 67 10 10 t GB0476 00 10 10 7 NEP el GB0057 64 e e E N e a o Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Editing and Deleting Accounts This changes the registered account information or deletes the account 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 60 display the screen 2 10 10 Deraulit Setting gt GB0461 01 2 Edit or delete an account To edit an account 1 Press for the account name you wish to edit System Menu Counter ANO ets cunctis iD a a enr oil b JU m Sales department 00000001 e 10 10 i Searches by account name 1 1 GB0473_00
327. tion included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 f you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes softw
328. tions press Keyboard to enter the login user name The name can also be entered using the numeric keypad Login User Name GB0723 00 GB0057 00 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N 2 Enter the login password 2500 Input 4 Input 4 Limit 64 Limit64 ABC a A q Ww e r t y u 0 p a S d f g h j k z x C V b Afm Press Password to enter the login password GB0057 01 Cancel User ee GB0057_00 Common Operations gt Login Logout Simple Login Logout 3 Log in Enter login user name and password 10 10 Login User Name i 2500 Keyboard Login Password kK Keyboard NOTE If Network Authentication is selected as the user authentication method either Local or Network can be selected as the authentication destination lt GB0023_00 If this screen is displayed during operations select a user and log in NOTE If a user password is required an input screen will be displayed Refer to Simple Login on page 9 46 N To logout from the machine press the Logout key to return to the login user name password entry screen Logout Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances e When the machine is put to Sleep by pressing the Power key e When the Auto Sleep function is activated e When the auto panel reset function is activated e When Auto Low Power Mode is activated
329. tton in the Advanced Sharing screen to close the screen 6 scannerdata Properties General Shani vious Versions Customize Object name C scannerdata Group or user names amp amp SYSTEM A PC0381 PCOO1 james smith JU Administrators PCO0 Administrators 2 To change permissions click Edit In Windows XP click the Security tab and then click the Add button 7 Proceed in the same way as in step 3 to add a user to Group or user names 8 Permissions for scannerdata Object name C scannerdata Group or user names Add Remove Permissions for james smith Allow Deny D dl RA Modify Read amp execute 2 Read un Leam about access control and permissions 3e Select the added user select the Modify and Read amp execute permissions sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Checking the Path Check the share name of the shared folder that will be the destination for the document 4 Display the window 1 Enter pc001 in Program and File Search in the Start menu pc001 scannerdata Shutdown gt In Windows XP click Search in the Start menu select All files and folders and search for the destination computer to which the file will be sent In Search Companion click Computers or people and then A computer on
330. tuaxais 10 23 MREP UMDOS AR sicir Ee monica O E E E E 10 24 Inside the Right Cover 1 cccccccecccsseceecceeeeceeeceeeceeeecaeeceesueeaueeaseesaeeseeessueseeeseas 10 24 SU 10 25 Inside the Right Cover 3 esssssssesssesseeseeee nennen nennen nnn nnn nnne rsen nasa anna as 10 25 ccu E E 10 26 Optional Document Finisher ueesseessesssssssssseee nennen nennen nnn nnns 10 26 Optional Document Finisher Staple Jam eeseeeseeeneeeneennnn nenne 10 27 EOS IA ecc c 10 27 Document PEOCSSSOD uaucusibvert sun E e E uU dE OUS boe LOU cupa NOU SN NUMMUS 10 28 11 POSING dies 11 1 Optional Equipment MRRETCH 11 2 Overview of Optional Equipment cece ceecccecceeecceeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeesaueseeeseeeeseeeaeeeees 11 2 Paper Feeder single cassette ccccccsscecceseecceeeeecesseecceeecsaueecsegeessseeessueeessaees 11 3 Paper Feeder double cassette ccccccccssssccceseeeceesecceeucecseuseesseeeessaeeesseseessagees 11 3 Document FINSNET e 11 3 FN p HH 11 3 Expansion Memory AM pTrTEEv 11 3 Card Authentication KIT PL 11 4 Gigabit Ethernet Board cccccccseccceecceeecceeceeeecaeec
331. uMaHre Korga ycrpoiicrBo OTKpbITO CLASS 3B B71 aol sae Ay HANAR VORSICHT KLASSE 3B UNSICHTBARE PERIGO RADIACAO DE LASERINVISIVEL DEP Te By eT HEBHBAMOS TIdaeDHOR p A ere LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG CLASSE 3B QUANDOABERTOEVITAR usnyyeHve kn acca 3B V3beraite S CCRC C 72A3BA BIRD JX GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN EXPOSICAODIRETA NO FEIXE npsivoro roranaHAs ria3epHOrTO nya C amp 3 UC AZiBi amp RICO fllUsuYc amp EEL 4 Maintenance For safety of the service personnel follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual 5 Safety switch The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened Preface gt Notice Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power Caution The power plug is the main isolation device Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source Attention Le d branchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l appareil hors tension Les interrupteurs sur l appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement ils ne mettent pas l appareil hors tension WARNING This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 and Part 18 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment
332. uch as the global address prefix using ICMPv6 This information is the Router Advertisement RA ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol and is a IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 Internet Control Message Protocol ICMPv6 for the Internet Protocol Version 6 IPv6 Specification Send as E mail A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E mail attachment E mail addresses can be selected from the list or entered at each time 11 25 Appendix gt Glossary SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol A protocol for E mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers Status Page The page lists machine conditions such as the memory capacity total number of prints and scans and paper source settings Subnet Mask The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0 The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of the network address The term prefix refers to something added to the beginning and in this context indicates the first section of the IP address When an IP address is written the length of the network address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash For example 24 in the address 133 210 2 0 24 In this way 133 210 2 0 24
333. uide This Guide Describes how to load paper basic copy print and scan operations and troubleshooting FAX Operation Guide Describes fax functionality Card Authentication Kit B Operation Guide Describes how to authenticate to the machine using the ID card KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide Describes how to access the machine from a computer via a Web browser to check and change settings Printer Driver User Guide Describes how to install the printer driver and use printer functionality Network FAX Driver Operation Guide Describes how to install and use the network fax driver in order to use network fax functionality KM NET for Direct Printing Operation Guide Describes how to use functionality for printing PDF files without launching Adobe Acrobat or Reader KMnet Viewer User Guide Describes how to monitor the network printing system with KMnet Viewer File Management Utility User Guide Describes how to distribute scanned documents over the network PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference Describes the native printer language PRESCRIBE commands PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference Describes PRESCRIBE command functionality and control for each type of emulation Contents 1 BE SS aaa cn eee attic ri sae invari uus pet rm weiss gen ea UNES PUN MUN UMEN NNMNUMEERIDINRESEUE 1 1 juo A o0
334. ule applies Steps Rule Type When does this rule apply Protocol and Ports Action 1 V Domain Profile Applies when a computer is connected to its corporate domain Name V Private Applies when a computer is connected to a private network location 7 Public Applies when a computer is connected to a public network location Leam more about profiles 2 Make sure all checkboxes are selected 6 13 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 9 r MP New Inbound Rule Wizard im Name Specify the name and description of this rule Steps Rule Type Protocol and Ports Action Profile Name Scan to SMB Name Descnption optional Enter Scan to SMB in Name and click Finish In Windows XP or Windows Vista 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel System and Security or Security Center and then Check Firewall Status or Windows Firewall If the User Account Control dialog box appears click the Continue button 2 Click the Exceptions tab and then the Add port button 3 Specify Add a Port settings Enter any name in Name example Scan to SMB This will be the name of the new port Enter 139 in Port Number Select TCP for Protocol 4 Click the OK button to close the Add a Port dialog box 6 14 sending gt Specifying Destination Specifying Destination Select the destination to which to send a
335. unts sssesssessssssseeeenee nennen nennen nnne nnns 9 65 Restricting the Use of the Machine cccccecccsecceeeceeeeceecseeeeeeeeseseseeesaeesaueesaeess 9 67 Counting the Number of Pages Printed eseseeesesseseseneeennennne 9 69 Printing an Accounting Report cccccccccecceseceeceeeceeeseeceeeceeeaeesaueseesaeeseeesenseesseees 9 71 Job Accounting Default Setting sseeseesssessseeseeeeeennee nennen nnns 9 73 Unknown Login User Name Job eessesessseenseneennnnennnn nennen 9 75 10 MOUNDS SIMO O UNG Bec 10 1 Toner Container Replacement ccccscccscccsecceeeecseeceeeseeeceeeceecaeesueeceeesueesaeessueseueeeas 10 2 Waste Toner Box Replacement cccccccscccecceeceeeeeeceecceesaeecaueseesageceeeceesageseeeseeseeeseees 10 4 PRO DIOGING SIA VCS E P 10 5 CTC AIAG 10 6 RASS POLO MER UU mU Um 10 6 Document Processor esaiavxapied vasa ed Vagina Runs ibl yao Vivis adiu tben ov d Va pod sto ovd epu 10 6 SOVNA MANUNCIOS sicap 10 8 Responding to Error Messages cccceccescceccececeeeaeeceeeceesaeesaecceeseecueeeeesaeeseeseessaeesenees 10 13 Clearing Paper JAMS NETTE mm 10 23 Jam Location Indicators svsicstuidvcvusiuundaurenaweutesseiuveeseduvdutimsuselueanainsivadunsuinatucsu
336. ur network administrator concerning destination folder sharing settings Basic Sending Send as E mail Sends a scanned original image as an E mail attachment page 6 18 Send to Folder SMB Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC page 6 19 Send to Folder FTP Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server page 6 19 Image Data Scanning with TWAIN WIA Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program page 6 45 NOTE Different sending options can be specified in combination Refer to Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending on page 6 23 The fax function can be used when the optional fax kit has been installed For details about this function refer to the FAX Operation Guide 6 2 Sending gt Basic Operation 1 Press the Send key Send NOTE If the touch panel is turned off press the Energy Saver key or the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up 2 Place the originals O For details refer to Loading Originals on page 3 7 3 Selecting color mode jal Auto Color Auto Color Automatically recognizes whether a document is color or black amp white and then scans the Qo document Full Color Scans all documents in full color id Full Color Black amp White Scans all documents in black amp white To make more detailed settings refer to Color Selection o
337. used Value Auto 10Base Half 10Base Full 100Base Half 100Base Full 1000BASE T A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces Description USB Host This locks and protects the USB memory slot A1 or USB port A2 USB host Value Unblock Block USB Device This locks and protects the USB interface connector B1 USB Device Value Unblock Block Optional Interface 1 This locks and protects the optional interface slots OPT1 or OPT2 Value Unblock Block Optional Interface 2 9 22 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu RAM Disk Setting RAM Disk Setting Description When optional memory is installed a RAM disk can be created and its size can be set Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a Job Box Value RAM Disk Setting Off On RAM Disk Size Setting range varies with Optional Memory settings A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Main Memory Main Memory Description Select the memory allocation scheme based on the application in which you are using the equipment Value Scan Size Priority Scan Pages Priority A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF an
338. using custom size originals 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Original Size 10 10 10 10 Copies 1 uH XX NENENEEEEEM aa 73 Original Size Paper th Zoom d Density x Auto 2 LS s N Selection TUS p porn QR s 4 Original Orientation Auto 100 Normal 0 2 Top Edge on Top E HEEEEEEEENNNM uo ee Teas EE Mixed Size Originals Duplex 4 3 Combine gg Collate off m 4 E uote Paper Output 1 sided 1 sided Off Collate Inner tray j Favorites Close Add Edit Shortcut GB0001 01 GB0002 00 Use v or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the original size Auto Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Inch Others gt Size Entry gt GB0025 00 pm ed Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Metric inch or Others Ready to copy Full Color ss to copy Full Color 10 10 10 10 Metric Inch Others gt Size Entry T pe m x Cancel OK e Cancel GB0025_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down select the original size Size Entry Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 sill Ea m Auto Metric Inch X 50 432 Y 50 297 Bm 297 n Edl 2 Cancel Ba OK d d Pre
339. uts Shortcuts Frequently used function screens can be registered as shortcuts so that they can be called up easily Registering Shortcuts You can register up to 2 shortcuts for copying functions sending functions and functions set for document box The following types of shortcuts are available Private Shortcut Private shortcuts are only available for use by the logged in user They can only be set while using user login administration Shared Shortcut Shared shortcuts can be used by all machine users When using user login administration shared shortcuts can only be set by users who have logged in as administrators 1 Display the screen 10 10 10 10 Copies 1 ae in o EE eee Original Size bee 55 Paper OR Zoom all Density el Auto Selection 35 Original Orientation Auto 100 Normal 0 S Top Edge on Top M a ee T Duplex Combine g Collate L Offset So 1 sided31 1 sided_ O Collate Mixed Size Originals E i n Paper Output GB0001 01 GB0002 00 Add Edit Shortcut Press Functions on the Copy Send or Document Box screen and then Add Edit Shortcut 2 Select Add 10 10 Add GB0790 00 3 Select the key 10 10 Private Shortcut 1 Private Shortcut 2 Shared Shortcut 1 Shared Shortcut 2 Cancel Next gt GB0791 00 Select the key to which you wi
340. uud o NNSSESESENNG Uu o 1 P al EcoPrint Duplex Combine gi Collate 1 1 sided 1 sided Off Offset E m at sa Hue Adjustment sv Favorites Close Add Edi Shortcut Use v or AN to scroll up and down GB0001 01 GB0002 01 2 Select the image quality Copy Send Scan to USB Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to send Text Photo D ABCD OCR Text for OCR Graphic Map Printer Output NENNEN C E GB0037 01 GB0037 02 3 52 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Sharpness Qo USB Adjust the sharpness of the image When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward Sharpen When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos in which moire patterns appear edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward Blur Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots Less Sharp Original More Sharp 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Sharpness Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Pora imn cet l Copies 1 m POT ci C cee Color Balance Mmm Paper Zoom ll Density Selection L sam Sharpness Auto 10096 Norma
341. ve been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture Specially treated paper We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper even if it conforms to the basic specifications When you use these kinds of paper purchase a small amount first as a sample to test Glossy paper e Watermarked paper e Paper with an uneven surface Perforated paper 11 13 Appendix gt Paper Special Paper This section describes printing onto special paper and print media The following paper and media can be used e Transparencies Preprinted paper Bond paper e Recycled paper Thin paper from 60 g m to 64 g m or less Letterhead Colored paper e Prepunched paper e Envelopes e Cardstocks Hagaki Thick paper from 106 g m to 256 g m or less Labels Coated paper e High quality paper When using these paper and media choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers such as laser printers Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies thick paper envelopes cardstocks and labels Choosing Special Paper Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine print quality will vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper Thus special paper is more likely than regular paper to cause printing problems Before purchasing special paper in volume try testing a sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory
342. whether or not to use ThinPrintOverSSL SSL must be set to On in SSL on page 9 22 Value Off On A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON 9 20 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu NetWare Description NetWare Select the NetWare network connection After that select frame types for NetWare network from Auto Ethernet Il 802 3 802 2 or SNAP Value Off On Frame Type Auto 802 3 Ether ll 802 2 SNAP A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON AppleTalk Item Description AppleTalk Select the Apple Talk network connection Value Off On A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON WSD Scan Item Description Select whether or not to use WSD Scan Value Off On A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON WSD Print Item Description Select whether or not to use WSD Print Value Off On A After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Enhanced WSD Description Enhanced WSD Set whether to use Kyocera s proprietary web services Selecting Off will disable the functionality of WIA and TWAIN drivers If you want to disable KMnet Viewer functionality Enhanced WSD Enhanced WSD SSL SNMP and SNMPv3 refer to Protocol Detail on page 9 20
343. y l doc all Density Normal 0 Functions GB0096_00 Cancel Enter the name Input 3 3 Limit 32 ABC an R q w e r t y u i o p a s d fig hj j k I 9 z xj c vibinimy Up to 32 characters can be entered GB0057 06 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N Add other information Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Use V or AN to scroll up and down None Date and Time Job No Job No amp Date and Time GB0068_00 Cancel lt Back 3 62 GB0002_04 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Priority Override Suspend the current job and give a new job top priority The suspended job resumes after the other job is finished NOTE This function is not available if current job was an override Print from USB Priority override may not be available depending on the status of the current print job and memory usage 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 30 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Priority Override Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Copies 1 i i ERE Job Finish Notice eL all Density Off uh File Name Entry Paper w Selection Normal 0 p Collate Offset 1 sided 1 sided Collate m 3 Priority Override Dup

KYOCERA FS-C8025MFP

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents